Specifications | Ford 2007 Focus Automobile User Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
12
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
12
18
Entertainment Systems
22
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD
Auxiliary input jack
Satellite radio information
Navigation system
Family entertainment system
Climate Controls
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
Dual automatic temperature control
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Upfitter controls
Moon roof
Message center
Tailgate
22
24
30
36
40
43
43
71
71
72
75
80
80
85
85
94
94
95
98
99
104
109
110
116
131
1
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
136
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
136
136
148
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Trailer brake controller-integrated
Recreational towing
Driving
151
151
158
171
180
192
195
196
212
219
223
230
231
Starting
Brakes
Traction Control™
Transmission operation
231
235
237
240
Roadside Emergencies
265
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
2
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
265
267
267
268
277
289
290
296
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
298
304
305
Cleaning
306
Maintenance and Specifications
314
Hood
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
315
316
319
322
324
330
349
350
352
Accessories
359
Index
361
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2006 Ford Motor Company
3
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration
(e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, maintain speeds below
70 mph (112 km/h) and vary speeds frequently. This is recommended to
give the moving parts a chance to break-in.
Do not tow a trailer or use your vehicle to snowplow until it has been
driven at least 500 miles (800 km). Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information on towing a trailer
and Snowplowing in the Driving chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, Ford Motor Company, S.A. de C.V. and
service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada and
Ford Motor Company, S.A. de C.V. do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or
other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently of Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada and Ford Motor Company, S.A. de C.V.
6
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Modification Data Recording
Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage; refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle
limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle’s Warranty
Guide for more information. Some vehicles are equipped with
Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about
vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output; this
information cannot be erased and will stay in the system’s memory even
if the modification is removed. When a dealer or repair facility works on
your vehicle, it may be necessary for them to access the information in
the Powertrain Control System. This information will likely identify if any
unauthorized modifications have been made to the system and may be
used to determine if repairs will be covered by warranty.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to
follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal
injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
7
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use
extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off
the road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of
their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to
the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation
and maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles in the
Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to Snowplowing in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures.
8
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the
driver’s side door pillar or on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. You
can determine whether the
ambulance manufacturer followed
Ford’s recommendations by directly
contacting that manufacturer. Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package is
only available on certain 6.4L Diesel
engine equipped vehicles.
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.
Export unique (non–United States/Canada) vehicle specific
information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be supplied
that complements this book. By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
9
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
10
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
11
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
12
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light description for additional information.
Note: Some Warning Lights are reconfigurable telltale (RTT) indicator
lights and will illuminate in the Message Center Display and function the
same as the warning light.
Check engine: The Check engine
indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the RUN
position to check the bulb. Solid
illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the RUN
position when the engine is not running, or in a position between RUN
and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned
to the RUN position. If the brake system warning light does not
illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your authorized
dealer. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake
fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by
your servicing authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
13
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to RUN, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound
when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A BeltMinder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder威 chime feature.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range. Refer to Engine oil
in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Powertrain malfunction/Reduced
power/Electronic throttle
control (RTT): Displays when the
engine has defaulted to a
“limp-home” operation or when a
transmission problem has been
detected and shifting may be restricted. If the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
14
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Traction control (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when the
Traction Control娂 system is active.
If the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer. Refer to
Traction control in the Driving chapter for more information
Check fuel cap (RTT): Displays
when the fuel cap may not be
properly installed. Continued driving
with this light on may cause the
Service engine soon warning light to
come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Displays when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and
let it cool. Refer to Engine coolant
in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Low fuel (RTT): Displays when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter).
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is in the RUN position
and any door is open.
15
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(automatic transmission)
(if equipped): The Tow Haul light
remains illuminated as long as the
Tow/Haul feature is activated. Refer to the Driving chapter for
transmission function and operation. If the light remains illuminated and
will not cancel using the Tow/Haul switch located on the end of the gear
shift lever, have the system serviced immediately or damage to the
transmission could occur.
Four wheel drive low
4x4
(if equipped): Illuminates when
LOW
four-wheel drive low is engaged.
Four wheel drive high
(if equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is engaged.
4x4
HIGH
Anti-theft: Flashes when the
SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-Theft
System has been activated.
Speed control (if equipped):
Illuminates when the speed control
is activated. Turns off when the
speed control system is deactivated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, it has some unique
warning lights; refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power
Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for
detailed information on their function.
16
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Diesel warning lights:
• Glow plug pre-heat
• Water in fuel
• Low oil pressure
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km). If the warning remains on after the parking brake is off, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Turn signal chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has been
activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven
more than 2 miles (3.2 km).
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appears in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 120 km/h (75 mph) or higher.
Airbag secondary warning chime: Sounds to inform the driver, in the
event that the airbag readiness warning lamp is inoperable, that there is
a fault in the supplemental restraint system
17
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
18
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Standard message center or
Optional message center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
If equipped with a one button
message center (Select/Reset),
press and release the
SELECT/RESET button on the
cluster to toggle between odometer and trip odometer display. To reset,
press and hold for less than 2 seconds.
If equipped with a three button message center, press and release
the message center INFO button until TRIP A or TRIP B appears in the
display. Press the RESET button to reset.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer.
19
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the RUN position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Battery voltage gauge (manual
transmission only): Indicates the
battery voltage when the ignition is
in the RUN position. If the pointer
moves and stays outside the normal
operating range, have the vehicle’s
electrical system checked as soon as
possible.
Transmission fluid temperature gauge (automatic transmission
only): If the gauge is in the:
Normal area (normal) - the
transmission fluid is within the
normal operating temperature
(between “H” and “C”).
Yellow area (warning) — the
transmission fluid is higher than
normal operating temperature. This
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing
or off road use). Refer to Special
Operating Conditions in the
scheduled maintenance
information for instructions. Operating the transmission for extended
periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal
transmission damage.
20
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area (over temperature) —
the transmission fluid is overheating.
Stop the vehicle to allow the
temperature to return to normal
range.
If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your authorized dealer.
21
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)
The AM/FM stereo system does not contain rear speakers; only front
driver side and passenger side speakers.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is
equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches
and radio may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition is turned
off or until either front door is opened.
/
(Tuner): Press to manually go up or down the radio
1.
frequency. Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings.
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to gain access to the following
settings.
TREB (Treble): Press AUDIO to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK
.
Use
22
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
BASS (Bass): Press AUDIO to reach the bass setting. Use
SEEK
.
/
/
BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK
to adjust between the left and right speakers.
Use
Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash,
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. To adjust minutes, press CLK
then use
/
/
again to make the minutes start to flash and use
to adjust. Press CLK again to exit the clock setting mode.
SEEK
SEEK
to
3. SEEK: Press
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press VOL PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn VOL PUSH to increase/decrease volume.
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between the clock and radio
frequency.
23
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM stereo single CD/satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and the audio for up to ten
minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is
opened.
/
: Press
/
to
1.
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
/
to tune to the
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
next/previous channel.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
: Press to mute the
2. MUTE/
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
24
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to access to the following settings:
CATEGORY (satellite radio if equipped): : Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
/
to scroll through the list of available
CATEGORY MODE, press
SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.)
SEEK, SEEK
or SCAN to select the category. After a
Press
category is selected, press SEEK to search for that specific category of
channels only (i.e. ROCK). To select a different category, press MENU
/
to select a
until the category appears in the display. Press
different category. You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all
available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOUR or SET MINUTES is
displayed. Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the
hours/minutes.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
Use
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left
Use
(L) and right (R) speakers.
25
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back
(B) and front (F) speakers.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
SEEK, SEEK
will scroll through all tracks on the
mode, pressing
disc
SEEK, SEEK
will scroll only through
In Folder mode, pressing
tracks within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available).
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS
Use
is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode, if
equipped) and SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if
equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
26
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
5. SEEK: In radio mode, press
/
to access the previous/next
strong station.
/
In CD/MP3 mode, press
to access the previous/next CD/MP3 track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
In TEXT MODE, press
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
/
(Play/Pause): This
6.
control is operational in CD/MP3
mode. When a CD/MP3 is playing,
press to pause or play the current CD/MP3. The CD/MP3 status will
display in the radio display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the DVD supplement for further information.
7. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the
current track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To
disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In CD/MP3 mode, press SHUFFLE to play the tracks in random
order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all tracks
within the current folder.
: In folder mode,
8. FOLDER
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
27
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
9.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be
to view the
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
28
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.
Note:If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last.
(CD eject): Press to eject a
17.
CD/MP3.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up in the CD slot.
29
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Premium/Audiophile in-dash six CD/MP3/satellite compatible sound
system (if equipped)
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and audio for up to ten
minutes after the ignition has turned off or until either front door has
opened.
/
(Tune/Disc selector):
1.
In radio mode, press to manually
) or down (
) the
go up (
radio frequency. Press and hold for
a fast advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
: Press to mute the
2. MUTE/
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
30
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access to the following settings:
CATEGORY (satellite radio if equipped): Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
/
to scroll through the list of available
CATEGORY MODE, press
SEEK
Sirius channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press
or SCAN to select the category. After a category is selected, press SEEK
to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). To
select a different category, press MENU until the category appears in the
/
to select a different category. You may also select
display. Press
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available Sirius categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the hours/minutes.
displayed. Press
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
Use
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
/
/
SEEK
to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
the display. Use
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
/
to find the desired type,
category appears in the display, press
SEEK, SEEK
or press and hold SCAN to
then press and release
begin the search.
31
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left
Use
(L) and right (R) speakers.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back
Use
(B) and front (F) speakers.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode) (Available on Audiophile radios only):
/
/
SEEK
to
Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
optimize sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Use
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder Mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
SEEK
will scroll through all tracks on the disc.
Mode, pressing
In Folder mode, pressing
SEEK
will scroll only through tracks
within the selected folder.
FOLDER, FOLDER
to access the previous/next folder (if
Press
available).
32
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
/
/
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
SEEK, SEEK
to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the
system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode, if
equipped), SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (Satellite Radio if equipped).
For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode, refer
to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
5. SEEK: In radio mode, press
/
to access the previous/next
strong station.
/
In CD/MP3 mode, press
to access the previous/next CD track.
SEEK, SEEK
to
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
SEEK, SEEK
to seek to the
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK
to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK, SEEK
to view the
previous/additional display text.
SEEK, SEEK
to select a category.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
(Play/Pause): This
6.
control is operational in CD/MP3
mode. When a CD/MP3 is playing,
press to pause or play the current CD. The CD status will display in the
radio display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the DVD supplement for further information.
33
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
7. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the
current track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To
disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
8. FOLDER
: In folder mode,
to access next
press FOLDER
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
FOLDER: In folder mode,
9.
FOLDER to access the
press
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
folders are available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
2 seconds to activate mode to hear
a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop.
34
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title and file name (if available).
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the
additional display text. When the “>” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels
in the selected category. Press again to stop.Satellite radio is available
only with a valid SIRIUS subscription. Check with your authorized
dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last.
17. LOAD: To load a disc into the
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will choose for
you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
35
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in the last slot loaded will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
18.
(CD eject): To eject a disc
. Select
from the system, press
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc.
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
until the system begins
ejecting the current disc. Remove the current disc and the next disc will
be ejected. If the current disc is not removed, the system will reload the
disc.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up.
Auxiliary input jack
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
36
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persist, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
37
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing.
Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner and wipe from the center
out.
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to only play commercially manufactured,
round (4.75 in / 12 cm) audio compact discs. Due to technical
38
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
incompatibility, certain homemade compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your authorized dealer.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to T255.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
39
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
1
.mp3 1
.mp3 2
2
.mp3 3
3
.mp3 4
.mp3 5
4
.mp3 6
.mp3 7
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: Satellite radio frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). SIRIUS Satellite Radio
broadcasts within a frequency range of 2320.0 MHz-2332.5 MHz. This
frequency range is sub-divided into over 120 channels of music, news,
sports, weather and traffic programming. For a complete set of SIRIUS
Satellite Radio channels, visit www.sirius.com or call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474. For a quick reference of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel guide, refer to the Sirius Welcome Kit.
40
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna Obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a continental
U.S. based satellite radio service that broadcasts over 120 channels of
music, sports, news and entertainment coast-to-coast. A service fee is
required in order to receive SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped
with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• SIRIUS online media player access: providing access to all 100%
commercial-free music channels over the internet. Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to obtain login instructions and your password.
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12 digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
41
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more
No action required.
than two seconds to
This message should
produce audio for the
disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Internal module or
If this message does
system failure
not clear within a short
present.
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously
available.
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
42
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
NO SIGNAL
UPDATING
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Condition
Song title information
not available.
Action Required
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Category information
Category information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
Loss of signal from
You are in a location
the SIRIUS satellite or
that is blocking the
SIRIUS tower to the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
vehicle antenna.
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Update of channel
No action required. The
programming in
process should take no
progress.
longer than one
minute.
Satellite service has
Call SIRIUS at
been deactivated by
1–888–539–7474 to
SIRIUS Satellite
re-activate or resolve
Radio.
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES) which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs
43
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The
DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs, CDs, MP3s and is
compatible with CD-R/W, CD-R and certain CD-ROM media.
Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and
controls as well as the very important safety information.
Quick start
Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system, two sets of
wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a wireless infrared (IR) remote
control.
To play a DVD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-R/W discs as well as
audio CDs and video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the
disc for finger prints, scratches and cleanliness. Clean with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a DVD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the system.
It will load automatically and begin
to play. If a DVD is already loaded in the system, press PLAY on the DVD
player.
The power indicator will turn on
automatically indicating the DVD
system is ON.
Press VIDEO to change the source
displayed on the screen. Press
repeatedly to cycle through:
DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX, NON-DVD,
OFF.
Press the power button to turn the
system OFF. The indicator light will
turn off indicating the system is off.
Note: The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers
and can be adjusted by the radio volume control.
44
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To play a CD in the DVD system:
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM and
video CDs. To ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger
prints and scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the
center to the edge.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert a CD into the system,
label-side up to turn on the DVD
system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a CD in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’CD Audio Disc’ screen will
display. From this screen, you can
also select from COMPRESSION,
SHUFFLE and SCAN features.
To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Insert an MP3 disc into the
system, label-side up to turn on the
DVD system. It will load and
automatically begin to play. If there
is already a disc in the system, press
PLAY on the DVD player.
3. The disc will begin to play and
the ’MP3 Audio Disc’ screen will
display and allow you to access the
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE, SCAN
and FOLDER MODE features.
45
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Press the power button to turn
the DVD system on. The indicator
light next to the power button will
illuminate.
3. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to the RCA jacks on
the left hand side of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio
input
4. Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX.
5. Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to
DVD-AUX. If your source is properly plugged in, it will appear on the
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screen. If your auxiliary source does not
have a video signal, or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal
from the auxiliary source, the screen will remain black. If the video
source is set to DVD-AUX, the display will automatically turn on if a
video signal is detected.
To listen to audio over the headphones (Dual play mode):
1. You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless
headphones. Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and
Using wired headphones for further information.
• Black (4) — wired headphone output (wired headphones not
included)
2. Press the headphone/speaker
button on the DVD player.
46
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control
Button to indicate which channel is active (able to be controlled).
3. Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel (A or
B). The audio source will be shown on the display. You may change the
active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, AUX). Channel B can only access DVD and
AUX sources.
Note: Refer to Single play/Dual play for more information.
Using the infrared (IR) wireless headphones:
1. Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON.
2. Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using
the A/B control on the ear piece.
3. Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece.
Using wired headphones (not included):
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
1. Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either
A or
B. Headphones
side of the DVD system. Each side is labeled
plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into
jack B will listen to Channel B.
2. Adjust the volume levels using
the volume controls on the DVD
system.
To adjust display brightness:
To decrease/increase the brightness
level on the display screen, press
the brightness control on the DVD
system. A display will appear at the
bottom of the screen indicating the
brightness level. The brightness display will only appear when the menu
is not displayed.
47
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
DVD player controls
16
1
2
3
ENTER
MENU
6
4
5
A
RETURN
MEDIA
B
VIDEO
VOLUME
14
15
10
12
13
7
11
9
8
1. Headphone control A/B: Press
to select either the A or B
headphone source. Then press
MEDIA to select the desired playing
media for that headset. When a
headphone channel has been selected (A or B), selections will affect the
source on that channel only.
Note: Headphone A can access any possible media (AM, FM1, FM2, SAT
(if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Headphone B can only access DVD
and DVD-AUX.
For further information, refer to Single play/Dual play later in this
section.
/
(Stop/Eject): Press once
2.
to stop and press a second time to
eject a disc from the DVD system.
(Reverse): Press and
3.
release for the previous chapter or
track. Press and hold to reverse
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
48
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
4.
(Fast forward): Press and
release for the next chapter or
track. Press and hold to forward
search a DVD, Video CD, or FES CD in DVD/CD mode.
/
(Play/Pause): Press
5.
(Play) to select DVD mode (and to
turn the DVD system on if it is off).
If a disc is present, it will resume or begin to play. Press (Pause) while
playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD.
6. On/Off: Press to turn the DVD
system On/Off.
7. VIDEO: Press repeatedly to cycle
through the following video state
options which will be indicated on
the bottom right hand corner of the
display: DVD DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD and Off (no indicator). If you select the DVD-AUX video
source, the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected. When
a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input, and the display is
in the DVD-AUX video mode, the display will automatically turn on.
8. Infrared (IR) Receiver & Transmitter: System sensor which reads
the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the
infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
9. LCD screen: The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and
up into housing to store when not in use. Ensure that the screen is
latched into the housing when being stored.
10. Volume: When in Single Play,
) or decrease
press to increase (
) the volume over all speakers.
(
When in Dual Play, press to increase
) or decrease (
) the volume
(
for the wired headphones. (Wireless headphone volume is controlled
with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press once for Dual Play
11.
(Headphone mode- the rear speakers are muted) and press again for
49
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Single Play (same media playing through all speakers). For further
interaction information, refer to Single Play/Dual play.
12. MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
select from the various possible
playing media sources (AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). The media will show in
the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode.
When in Single Play mode, the media source will be displayed on the
radio.
Note: Channel A can access any possible media source (AM, FM1, FM2,
SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, DVD-AUX). Channel B can only access
DVD and DVD-AUX sources.
13. RETURN: Press to return to the
playing media or to resume
playback.
14. MENU: When playing a DVD,
press MENU once to enter the DVD
disc menu (if available) and press
twice to enter the system set-up menu. From the set-up menu, you may
select from Angle, Aspect Ratio, Language, Subtitles, Disc resume,
Compression, Restore Defaults and Back. For more detailed information,
refer to Menu mode.
15. ENTER: Press to select/confirm
the current selection.
16. Cursor /Brightness controls:
Use the cursor controls to make
various selections when in any
menu. When not in a menu, and in
/
to adjust
DVD mode, press
the brightness. A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen
indicating the brightness levels.
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
50
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
1. Power control: Press to turn the FES (Family Entertainment
System) ON/OFF.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a Menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of the FES functions
and adjustments.
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. ANGLE (DVD dependent): Press to select the angle to view the
scene.
6. Channel A/B: Press to select either A or B headphones and then use
the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the
headphones.
) or
7. VOL (Volume): When in Single Play, press to increase (
) the volume over all speakers. When in Dual Play, press to
decrease (
increase (
) or decrease (
) the volume for the wired headphones.
51
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
(Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the
right ear piece.)
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD.
10. SHUFFLE: Press to play all tracks on the current CD/MP3 disc in
random order.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD or CD/MP3.
12.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to toggle
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode — the rear speakers are muted).
13. Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD/MP3
track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA: Press to cycle through the possible media sources: AM,
FM1, FM2, SAT (if equipped), CD, DVD, LINE IN (if equipped),
DVD-AUX.
Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources.
16. VIDEO: Press to cycle through video states: DVD-DISC, DVD-AUX,
NON-DVD, Off.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the FES.
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections. Press
MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set-up
menu.
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired
language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons.
52
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit. Since all batteries
have a limited shelf life, replace them when the unit fails to control the
DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
53
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Headphones
Wireless headphones
Your FES system is equipped with
two sets of battery powered,
infrared wireless headphones. Two
AAA batteries are needed to operate
the headphones. (Batteries are
included.)
Additional infrared wireless
headphones may be purchased for
use with the system. Also, wired
headphones may be purchased and
plugged in where indicated on the
left and right hand sides of the
system. Refer to Wired
Headphones below.
54
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To install the batteries, remove the screw at the bottom of the cover.
Then, lightly press down on top and slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them with the correct orientation as indicated
in the battery housing.
55
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To operate the headphones:
• Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON. Press
POWER again to turn the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the
headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source (Channel A or B) for each set of
wireless headphones by using the A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
• Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
56
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Wired headphones
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
You may purchase wired headphones for your FES (Family
Entertainment System). Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s)
located on the left and right sides of the system. (Channel A is located
on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side.) These
headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD
system. The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left
side of the FES and is labeled
A. Headphones plugged into this
headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the
Channel A source. The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on
B. Headphones plugged into
the right side of the FES and is labeled
this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be
the Channel B source.
Adjust the headphone volume using
the volume control on the DVD
system.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to enable the front and rear seat
passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways.
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on, and the same source is playing through the front and
rear speakers, SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display.
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to the radio, CD, MP3, DVD, or DVD-AUX media sources
57
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for
the front audio system, they may listen to another over the headphones.
DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display.
When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen
to the same audio source, SHARED MODE will appear on the radio.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio, however they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
Press
/
on the DVD player to
listen to audio over the headphones.
The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the
A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate. The system can output
two different audio sources over the headphones. These are called
Channel A and Channel B. Both Channel A and Channel B can be
listened to on the wired headphones (not included) or on the infrared
(IR) wireless headphones.
Press the Headphone Control button
A to change the audio source for
Channel A.
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source for Channel A. This
information will display on the DVD
system screen.
Press the Headphone Control button
B to change the audio source for
Channel B.
Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B. This information
will display on the DVD system screen. Channel B can listen to either
the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs (DVD-AUX).
Operation with an aftermarket audio system
(Headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to
as “Headphone Only Mode”.
58
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A&B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
Menu mode
Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if
available.
Press MENU twice to access the DVD set-up menu and the following
features:
1. ZOOM
2. ANGLE
3. ASPECT RATIO
4. LANGUAGE
5. SUB TITLES
Angle mode
Select ANGLE to select various
angles of view for the DVD.
This is disc dependent — some
DVD discs may have more viewing
angles to select from. Once you
have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. The system
default is Angle 1.
59
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Aspect ratio
Select ASPECT RATIO to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent.
You can select from: WIDE, LETTER
BOX or PAN SCAN. Once you have
made your selection, press ENTER
to confirm. The LCD screen display
will immediately change to your
selection after the system resumes
playback of the DVD. The system
default is WIDE (16:9). This is disc
dependent.
Language
Select LANGUAGE to select the
language you would like to use for
audio output (English, Spanish,
French). This is disc dependent.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. The
system default is English.
60
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Subtitles
Select SUBTITLES to turn the
subtitle option on or off. The system
default is OFF.
Once you have made your selection,
press ENTER to confirm. This is
disc dependent.
Audio CDs
To play audio CDs on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert an audio CD into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The track and elapsed time will
appear in the status bar. Use the
DVD cursor controls on the bezel to
highlight which track you would like
to play. You can also use the cursor
controls to highlight
COMPRESSION, SHUFFLE or
SCAN. Once you have highlighted
the desired track or function, press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm
your selection.
COMP (Compression): Compression brings soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press to
turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order.
Press again to stop.
61
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD. Press
again to stop.
Playing MP3 discs
To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system:
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the DVD system is ON.
3. Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system, label side up.
4. The folder, track and elapsed
time will appear in the status bar.
The screen will list the Artist, Title,
Album and File Name.
COMP (Compression):
Compression brings soft and loud
CD/MP3 passages together for a
more consistent listening level when
in CD mode. Press to turn the feature ON/OFF
SHUFFLE: Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random
order. Press again to stop.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder.
Press again to stop.
FOLDER LIST: Press access folder mode and to go to the previous/next
folder in the MP3 disc.
MP3 disc quality factors
Several factors can effect disc playback quality:
• Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity.
We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of
storage.
• Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may
cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files
onto CD-R discs.
• Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of
adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session
or the disc will not play.
• Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 32–320 kbps, as well as
variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable
62
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low
fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files
using a high quality encoder.
• PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your
computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations
of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid
running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding
to avoid undesirable noise and distortion.
CD, MP3 and CD player care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if
equipped).
• Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage
or warp discs.
• Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which
are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are
regular CDs.
• Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the
playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or
the player.
• Never insert any object other than a compact disc (CD) or digital
versatile disc (DVD) into the player, as doing so may damage the
player and may cause injury to you.
• Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is
extremely harmful to the eyes.
The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed
12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and digital versatile discs
(DVD) only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable
and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD and DVD players. Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs,
CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the FES DVD system. The label may peel and cause the CD
or DVD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs.
Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
63
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Playing a DVD
1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY
position.
2. Ensure that the navigation system is on.
3. Insert a DVD label-side up into the system.
4. Use the DVD bezel controls to:
Press to play or pause a DVD.
Press to stop or eject a DVD.
Press and release to go to the
previous chapter. Press and hold for
a fast reverse search.
Press and release to go to the next
chapter. Press and hold for a fast
forward search.
Press when not in menu mode to
adjust brightness, or when in menu
mode to navigate through the menu
selections.
Press to adjust volume levels.
Slow play
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press and hold the reverse or
advance button to enter into slow
play mode. Once in slow play mode,
press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle
through 1/4 and 1/2. These will display on the status bar on top of the
screen as the screens cycle through at this rate.
64
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Frame by frame
1. With a DVD playing, press pause.
2. Press the right cursor button. The
DVD will advance one frame. Each
press of the right cursor button will
advance the DVD video by one
frame.
Headphone/auxiliary jacks
There are wired headphones (not included) and auxiliary jacks on the
left and right side of your DVD system. They can be used to plug in
wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices
such as game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc.
On the left side of the system is the
Headphone A input jack. This
headphone will listen to the media
selected on the Channel A source.
When you need to make any
adjustments to the media, volume,
etc, ensure that the Channel A
source is highlighted. For more
information, refer to Headphone
adjustments.
Also located here are the various
auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR, camcorder, video
games, etc. The specific jacks are as follows:
1. Yellow: video input
2. White: left channel audio input
3. Red: right channel audio input
4. Black: wired headphone jack ( not included)
65
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
The B headphone jack (5) is located
on the right side of the DVD system.
Plug in wired headphones (not
included) here.
Note: The B headphones can only
access DVD and AUX modes. They
cannot access radio sources.
Audio displays
Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system. Status
messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status. Some
possible radio display messages:
• SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY
• DVD LOAD
• DVD MENU
• DVD STOP
Audio interaction
You can then also use the front audio controls to advance, reverse, play
and pause a DVD. While a DVD is playing you may use the following
controls on the front radio:
• SEEK: Press to advance to the previous (
chapters.
•
) or next (
) DVD
: Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD.
When the radio displays “DVD MENU”, press PLAY on the radio
(memory preset #6), to play the disc.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are three levels of control of
the FES buttons. The states are
FULL (enabled), LOCAL or
LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls. The
control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously.
The three states are described as:
66
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCAL: The FES has control over the secondary source (headphones)
only. The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary
(speaker) audio source.
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
When the DVD system is ON, you
1
2
3
4
5
6
can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to
toggle between Single Play and Dual Play. In Single Play mode, all
speakers listen to the same media. In Dual Play mode, rear seat
passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired (not included)
headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat
passengers.
General information
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3: Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,
non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to
use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue generating) real time
broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and /or any other media)
broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in
other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
Safety information
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
67
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children operate the system while unsupervised. If wired
headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the
DVD system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full attention to
driving and to the road. Pull off the road in a safe place before
inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote control is
included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the
FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
68
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one.
Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
69
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems
(headphone only mode)
When the Family Entertainment System (FES) detects that the original
radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the
vehicle, the FES will work in a state referred to as “Headphone Only
Mode.” This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system,
without interface to the radio.
While operating in Headphone Only Mode, the system will have limited
functionality.
• The system will only output audio to the headphones. It will not be
capable of providing audio to the speakers.
• The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD-DISC
and DVD-AUX, regardless of headphone channel (A or B).
• When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode,
both headphone channels (A and B) will be connected to FES-DISC.
70
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control:
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents,
floor vents and demister vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear windshield of fog and thin ice.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the O (OFF)
position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
71
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
(IF EQUIPPED)
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system with heated
mirrors
• Manual heating and air
conditioning system with heated
mirrors and heated seats
72
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents only to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. Can
be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
4.
in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down
the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors
from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
and
.
automatically in MAX A/C,
(Heated mirrors): Press to turn the heated mirrors on and off.
6.
The heated mirrors turn off automatically after 10 minutes.
(Heated seats): Press to turn the heated seats on and off. The
7.
heated seats automatically shut off after 10 minutes. The heated seats
turn off when the ignition is turned off.
73
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (OFF) position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C) in MAX A/C mode:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust in order to
maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
74
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEMS
(IF EQUIPPED)
• DATC
• DATC with heated mirrors
75
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• DATC with heated seats and heated mirrors
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Units (English/Metric) under either Standard Message Center
or Optional Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter
,
In order to achieve maximum cooling performance, press
, and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C) and the highest
A/C,
blower setting.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
and demister vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the
select another mode.
windshield. To exit
2. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
passenger side temperature in the vehicle cabin.
3A. Dual: (Single/dual electric temperature control): Allows the driver to
have full control of the cabin temperature settings (single zone) or
allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature
settings (dual zone control). Press to turn on dual zone mode, press
again to return to single zone.
Heated mirrors: Press to defrost the outside rear view
3B.
mirrors. The heated mirrors will turn off after 10 minutes or can be
turned off by pressing the button again. Refer to Power mirrors in the
Driver Controls chapter for more information.
76
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
(defrost).
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
5. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in AUTO,
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
6.
vents.
7.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
8.
vents.
9.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
11.
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
12. EXT: Press to display outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
14. Driver temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the driver
side temperature in the vehicle cabin.
15. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
Heated seat controls: Press to turn the heated seats on and off.
16.
The heated seats automatically turn off after 10 minutes, or when the
ignition is turned off.
77
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) system operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
position.
the air flow selector in the
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
engaged and A/C off.
system OFF, or with recirculated air
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out”.
• For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
Automatic operation:
• Press AUTO for full automatic operation.
• Do not override A/C or
(recirculated air).
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
Override operation:
• Select air distribution.
(recirculated air). Use
(recirculated air)
• Select A/C and
with A/C to provide colder airflow.
• Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
In
(panel) or
(panel/floor) modes:
• Move temperature control to full cold.
(recirculated air). Use recirculated air with A/C
• Select A/C and
to provide colder airflow.
• Set highest fan speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
78
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
79
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or on vehicles equipped
with a message center, you can
select a delay from 0–180 seconds,
after the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
80
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position,
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp position and
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
81
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
illuminated switches in the vehicle
during headlamp and parklamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sealed beam or aerodynamic
headlamp system. Sealed beam headlamps may be aimed in the vertical
(up/down) and the horizontal (left/right) directions using the procedures
following. The aerodynamic headlamps can only be aimed in the vertical
direction (up/down) using the following procedures. The headlamps on
your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant and should not
normally need adjusting.
Vertical and horizontal aim adjustment (sealed beam headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level
surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away from a vertical plain surface
(3). Check your headlamp alignment
at night or in a dark area so that
you can see the headlamp beam
pattern.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
82
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• (4) Horizontal reference line
• (5) Center of headlamps
• (6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or
cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (4). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (2)
for each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by turning the adjuster control
either clockwise (to adjust up) or
counterclockwise (to adjust down).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (5) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (1) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high
intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
83
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Vertical aim adjustment (aerodynamic headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the
headlamps so no light from that lamp hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a E5 Torx
socket to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
84
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
MAP LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
BULBS
Headlamp condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Function
Headlamps (aerodynamic)
Headlamps (sealed beam)
Park lamp with aerodynamic
headlamp
Park lamp with sealed beam
headlamp
Number of
bulbs
2
2
2
Trade number
H13/9008
H6054
3157A or 3157AK
2
4157K/3157
85
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Function
Number of
bulbs
2
2
Trade number
Sidemarker
194
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker
4157K or 3157
(Pick-up only)
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker
2
3157
(Chassis cabs only)
Back-up (Pick-ups only)
2
3156 or 3156K
Back-up (Chassis cabs only)
2
3157
High-mount stoplamp
1
906
Foglamp
2
9145
License plate lamp
2
194
Cargo lamp
2
906
Mirror turn signal
2
2825
Mirror clearance lamp
2
2825
Front clearance lamps (2) and
5
194
Front identification lamps (3)
Rear fender clearance*
4
W5W
Interior visor lamp (if equipped)
4
194
Rear identification
3
194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* Dual rear wheels, or if equipped.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
86
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
2. Remove the four bolts from the
top, side and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging two snap clips to
fender.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward and then pulling it
rearward.
5. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
87
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing park/turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the four bolts from the
top, side and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out.
4. Remove the bulb assembly, (1)
sidemarker or (2) park/turn by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
5. Pull the old bulb out from the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
88
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the three screws and one
bolt from the top and bottom of the
park lamp/bezel assembly.
3. Remove the four screws and the
headlamp retaining ring from
headlamp.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the headlamp.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
89
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing park/turn/sidemarker bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the four bolts from the
top, side and bottom of the park
lamp/bezel assembly.
3. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging snap clip.
4. Remove the bulb assembly,
sidemarker or park/turn by turning
it counterclockwise. (Top view of
assembly shown.)
5. Pull the old bulb out from the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
90
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs - Pick-ups only
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
tail lamp assembly and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the tailgate
pillar by releasing the two retaining
tabs.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/turn/back-up lamp bulbs - Chassis cabs only
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
91
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brakelamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the two screws and lamp
assembly from vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Front clearance and identification lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Install the bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
92
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
93
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
94
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering up or down
until you find the desired location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Tow/Haul feature (5–speed automatic transmission) (if equipped)
To activate, press the transmission
control switch (TCS) located on the
gearshift. The TOW/HAUL indicator
light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. The transmission
will operate in all gears. Press the
transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow/Haul mode. When
you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically
return to normal mode with Tow/Haul feature deactivated. For more
information, refer to the Driving chapter.
Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss
of vehicle control.
95
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. If your vehicle is equipped with a moon roof, refer
to One-touch moonroof later in this chapter for information on its
operation.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release on the door to
open the storage compartment.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object and the front tab can
be used for holding tickets, paper,
envelopes, etc. The front bin may be
used to store small objects.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
96
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
On SuperCab and Crew Cab models, another power point is located
on the rear of the center console (if equipped).
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Note: If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse
may have blown. Refer to the Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter information on checking and replacing fuses.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
97
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s, press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
98
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
AUTO
Driver Controls
Power rear slider window (if equipped)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
• Press the right side of the control
to open the window.
• Pull the right side of the control
to close the window.
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
any front door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRRORS
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror which has
an auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
99
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) (when the mirror is on) to ensure a
bright clear view when backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the inside rear
view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
The spotter mirror below the main glass (if equipped) must be adjusted
manually.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
The main mirror glass is heated to
remove ice, mist and fog. To activate
the heated mirrors, press the heated
) located on the
mirror control (
climate control panel. The heated
mirrors will operate for 10 minutes,
then automatically shut off (or shut
off when the engine is turned off).
In cases of extreme ice and cold, the
heater control may need pressing
again after 10 minutes in order to
fully clear the glass. The spotter mirror below the main glass is not heated.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
re-adjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space,
like an automatic car wash.
100
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
If equipped with powerfold mirrors,
you can fold the side mirrors
simultaneously using the power
mirror switch.
1. Rotate the switch to the center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design
position.
Note: When powerfolding the mirrors, it is normal to hear the sound of
the motors.
Mirror positions, from left to right: Position 1, Position 2, Position 3
The powerfold mirrors may be folded forward/rearward manually to any
of the three positions shown and electrically to positions 1 and 2 only. If
a mirror is folded manually forward to position 3, you must manually fold
it back to position 1 or 2 in order for the powerfold function to continue
functioning.
Note: Ten or more switch activations within one minute, or repeated
fold/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during
the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect the motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait
approximately 31⁄2 minutes for the system to reset and function to return
to normal.
Note: The powerfold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is
stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to powerfold
101
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
the mirrors at high speeds, they may not fully fold forward/rearward slow down and powerfold or manually fold the mirrors in order to
complete the fold operation.
If the powerfold mirrors feel loose or fold very easily, it is possible that
the powerfold mechanism is out of sync. The powerfold mechanism gets
out of sync when a mirror is manually folded partially in toward the door,
then electrically powerfolded.
Note: The mirrors will not be out of sync if the mirrors are manually
folded all the way in or out and then powerfolded.
In order to re-sync the mirrors, manually fold the mirrors toward the
door until a click is heard. Then press the powerfold switch to
electrically fold the mirrors in then out.
Telescoping mirrors (if equipped)
The telescoping feature allows the
mirror to extend approximately
2.75 inches (70 mm). This feature is
especially useful to the driver when
towing a trailer. Mirrors can be
manually pulled out or pushed in to
the desired telescopic position.
If equipped with power telescoping
mirrors, you can simultaneously
position both mirrors using the
power telescope switch found on
the door trim panel.
• To telescope the mirrors
outboard, press and hold the left
side of the power telescope
switch until the mirrors reach their desired position. When the end of
travel is reached, it is normal to hear the power telescoping motors
running as long as you continue to hold the switch.
• To telescope the mirrors inboard, press and hold the right side of the
power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their desired position.
102
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Memory mirrors (if equipped)
This system allows automatic positioning of the outside rearview mirrors.
For more information on this feature, refer to Memory seats/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signals are
activated, the outer portion of the
mirror housing will blink amber.
The turn signal feature can be seen
by other drivers who may approach
from the rear of the vehicle.
Clearance lamps (if equipped)
Illuminates when the headlamps or
parking lamps are switched on.
This provides additional visibility of
your vehicle to other drivers on the
road.
103
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 2.75 inches (70 mm) of
maximum travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a
memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle
personality features when a memory position is selected through the
remote entry transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the
driver’s door (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory
seats/mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
104
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
on the
5. The indicator light
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
105
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control.
106
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Audio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2
• CD (if equipped)
• DVD (if equipped)
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode, if equipped).
107
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
SEEK
to
• Press
select preset stations within the
selected radio band or press and
hold to select the next/previous
radio frequency.
In Satellite radio mode
(if equipped):
SEEK
to
• Press
advance through preset channels or subscribed channels.
In CD mode:
SEEK
to select the next selection on the CD or
• Press
press and hold to forward or reverse the CD.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
Climate control features (if equipped)
Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
108
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press FAN + or - to adjust fan
speed.
UPFITTER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the Upfitter option package which
will provide four switches, mounted
in the center of the instrument
panel, labeled AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3
and AUX 4. These switches will only
operate while the ignition is in the
3 (ON) position, whether the engine
is running or not. It is, however, recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for
extended duration or higher current draws. (This is even more important
for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining
battery power when the ignition key is in the 3 [ON] position.)
When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps, 15 amps or
30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, there will also be a relay box
located on the driver side end of the instrument panel. See your
authorized dealer for service.
109
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The relays are coded as shown in
the accompanying illustration.
RELAY
4
RELAY
3
RELAY
2
RELAY
1
There will also be one power lead
for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located below the
instrument panel and to the left of
the steering column.
They are coded as follows:
Switch
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
Circuit number
Wire color
CAC05
Yellow
CAC06
Green with
Brown Trace
CAC07
Violet with
Green Trace
CAC08
Brown
Fuse
30A
30A
10A
15A
More detailed information about the Upfitter switches can be found in
the Upfitter Switches bulletin found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/non-html/Q117.pdf.
ONE-TOUCH MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
110
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: The moon roof will open to
the “comfort” position first before
opening all the way. The “comfort”
position helps to alleviate rumbling
wind noise which may happen in the
vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Press and release the
AUTO control. The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position. Press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
control again.
feature press either the AUTO or
control until the glass
To close the moon roof: Press and hold the
panel stops at the “comfort” position. Press and hold the control again
until the glass stops moving (the moon roof does not go to the comfort
position). When fully closed, the rear portion of the glass panel will
appear higher than the front portion.
control. The moon
To vent the moon roof: Press and hold the
roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the
vent position. To close, press and hold the AUTO control until the glass
panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
111
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
112
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink威 buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink威.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until
the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian residents.
4. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威
button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 5 through
7 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
113
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace Step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.
114
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
115
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/CD holder
• Coin holder
• Pen holder
• Writing surface
• A power point inside and on the
rear
• Laptop storage
• Hanging file folder supports
• Rear cupholders (Crew Cab only)
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays text messages that alert
you to possible problems or
malfunctions in your vehicle’s
operating systems. All warning
messages will also provide an
indicator chime.
Selectable features
Press and release the SELECT/RESET control switch to scroll and reset
the following functions. Select or reset the function by holding the
SELECT/RESET button for more than 2 seconds.
Info menu
This menu displays the following control displays:
• Trip Odometer (Trip A and Trip B)
• Distance to Empty
116
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
•
•
•
•
Average Fuel Economy
Setup Menu
System check
Blank (Odometer and compass, if equipped, off)
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO MENU estimates
approximately how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a chime for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and chime will return
within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function to display your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing miles traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel
used by 100 kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
117
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SELECT/RESET control switch (press and
hold for 2 seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Setup menu
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET
control switch to get into the
SETUP MENU sequence from the
INFO MENU for the following
displays:
• Units (English/Metric)
• Language
• Reset to English (if in another language) (see Note below)
Note: When returning to the
SETUP menu and a non-English
language has been selected, HOLD
RESET FOR ENGLISH will be
displayed to change back to English.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET
control to change back to English.
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP MENU for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press and hold the
SELECT/RESET control switch to
change from English to Metric.
3. Press the SELECT/RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU
item or wait for more than 4 seconds to return to the INFO MENU.
118
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Language
Note: When entering the SETUP
MENU and a non-English language
has been selected, “PRESS RESET
FOR ENGLISH” will be displayed to
change back to English.
1. Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current language
to be displayed.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET control to select a new language.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French
3. Press the SELECT/RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU
item or wait for more than 4 seconds to return to the INFO MENU.
System check
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET control switch to select SYSTEM
CHECK when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the
message center. Selecting this function from the INFO MENU causes the
message center to cycle through each of the systems being monitored.
For each of the monitored systems, the message center will indicate
either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds. Pressing
the SELECT/RESET control switch cycles the message center through
each of the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. ENGINE HOURS
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. AIR FILTER (Diesel engine only)
4. DOOR AJAR
5. BRAKE SYSTEM
6. FUEL LEVEL
7. TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped)
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will cycle
the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4 seconds.
119
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
SELECT/RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-RUN cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warning display
Park brake engaged
Check brake system
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Low fuel level
Trailer fault (if equipped)
TBC fault (if equipped)
Trailer disconnected (if equipped)
Check air filter (Diesel engine only)
Low brake fluid level
Drain water separator (Diesel engine only)
Status
Warning returns after
10 minutes if condition
still exists.
Warning returns after
the ignition key is
turned from OFF to
RUN.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger’s door is not
completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
LOW FUEL LEVEL Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.
120
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied
(or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by
the ABS module.
TRAILER FAULT (if equipped): Displayed if there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire or the trailer brakes are drawing too much
current. Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TBC FAULT (if equipped): Displayed in response to faults sensed by
the trailer brake controller (TBC). In the event this message is seen,
please take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair.
Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped): Displayed when a trailer
connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Integrated
trailer brake controller in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
CHECK AIR FILTER (Diesel engine only): Refer to Instrument
Cluster in your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR (Diesel engine only) Displayed when
the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to
be drained. Refer to your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection
Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
121
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle
information through a constant
monitor of vehicle systems. You
may select display features on the
message center for a display of
status. The system will also notify
you of potential vehicle problems
with a display of system warnings
followed by an indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
122
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Drive Time (Elapsed Travel
Timer)
• Blank (Odometer and compass, if
equipped, off)
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return
within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
123
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing miles traveled
since last fill-up by gallons of fuel used (multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Drive timer (Elapsed travel timer)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
124
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolamp Timer Presets (if
equipped)
• Autolock On/Off (if equipped)
• Compass calibration
• Language
• Reset to English (if in another
language) (see Note below)
Note: When returning to the
SETUP menu and a non-English
language has been selected, HOLD
RESET FOR ENGLISH will be
displayed to change back to English.
Press and hold the RESET control
to change back to English.
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. ENGINE HOURS
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
125
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3.
4.
5.
6.
AIR FILTER (Diesel engine only)
DOOR AJAR
BRAKE SYSTEM
FUEL LEVEL
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolamp timer presets
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
seconds.
Autolocks
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Compass display (if equipped)
The compass heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW in the message center display.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
126
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
2. Turn ignition to the RUN position.
3. Start the engine.
4
1
15
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
4. From the SETUP menu, press
and release the RESET control until
the message center display changes
to show the current zone setting
(XX).
5. Press and release the RESET control repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
The range of zone values are from 1 to 15 and “wraps” back to 1.
6. To exit the zone setting mode, and to “lock in” your change:
• press and release the SETUP control or,
• press INFO control to exit or,
• wait 4 seconds and the zone will be “locked in”.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
127
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
7. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
8. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE display changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. It will
take up to five circles to complete calibration.
9. The compass is now calibrated.
Note: If the RESET control is
pressed or 3 minutes has expired,
the display will go back to the INFO
menu and will show CAL instead of
the compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Waiting 4 seconds or pressing the
RESET control cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
3. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds to set the language
choice.
4. Press the SETUP control to exit.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
128
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-RUN cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warning display
Park brake engaged
Check brake system
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Low fuel level
Trailer fault (if equipped)
TBC fault (if equipped)
Trailer disconnected (if equipped)
Check air filter (Diesel engine only)
Low brake fluid level
Drain water separator (Diesel engine only)
Status
Warning returns after
10 minutes if condition
still exists.
Warning returns after
the ignition key is
turned from OFF to
RUN.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger’s door is not
completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
LOW FUEL LEVEL Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied
(or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by
the ABS module.
129
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TRAILER FAULT (if equipped): Displayed if there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire or the trailer brakes are drawing too much
current. Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TBC FAULT (if equipped): Displayed in response to faults sensed by
the trailer brake controller (TBC). In the event this message is seen,
please take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair.
Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped): Displayed when a trailer
connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Integrated
trailer brake controller in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
CHECK AIR FILTER (Diesel engine only): Refer to Instrument
Cluster in your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR (Diesel engine only) Displayed when
the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to
be drained. Refer to your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection
Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for more information.
130
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow
more room for loading.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the
spring clip (on each connector) past
the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
3. Disconnect the other cable.
4. Lift tailgate to a 45° angle.
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.
6. Lift tailgate back up to within 10° of its closed position while keeping
the right-hand side of the tailgate close to the box.
7. Pull left-hand hinge straight to the right to disengage the left-hand
tailgate hinge socket from the left-hand box pivot post.
8. Lift left side off of its hinge.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
131
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Tailgate step (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into
the truck bed. To open the tailgate step:
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the
Unlock positon ( ) to release the
grab handle from it’s stowed postion
and raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the latch
lever in the Lock positon ( ). The
yellow lever only needs to be used
when releasing the grab handle.
3. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate.
4. Flip open the panel to widen the
step.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate step only when the
vehicle is on level surface.
• Operate step only in areas with
sufficient lighting
• Always open flip panel to widen step.
• Always use grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Step not intended for bare-footed use.
• Keep step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud)
• Keep the step load (you + load) below 350 lbs. (159 kg).
• Never drive with step deployed.
To close the tailgate step:
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
• Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
132
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Replace slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
• Replace handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
• Do not tow with grab handle or step frame.
Bed extender (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the
truck bed.
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
To open the bed extender into Tailgate Mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the storage hinge rearward
to unlatch the panels.
133
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
4. Connect the two panels, then rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.
5. Ensure the latch rod is inserted
into the tailgate hole and the locking
pins on both sides are engaged into
their holes in the pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.
134
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, ensure the locking pins and knobs
are fully engaged.
Note: Ensure all cargo is secured.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, the tailgate load must not exceed
150 lbs. (68 kg).
To open the bed extender into Grocery Mode, follow Steps 1–5 by
rotating the panels away from the tailgate.
135
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-theft
system, your keys are coded to your vehicle; using a non-coded key will
not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied keys,
replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if
your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing button 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the
remote entry keypad (if equipped), or using the lock button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
Autolock feature (if equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
136
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than 2 seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (ON)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than 2 seconds.
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
There are four methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Optional message center in the Driver controls chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and
all vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30
seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure
needs to be repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning
again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON)
position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
137
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. The horn will chirp
once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature (if equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features deactivated; there are
three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped)
138
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and
all vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30
seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure
needs to be repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning
again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON)
position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. The horn will chirp
once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
139
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage
the childproof lock.
• Move lock control down to
disengage the childproof lock.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
140
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
1. Press
lamps will illuminate.
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
2. Press
doors.
Locking the doors
and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
1. Press
flash if all the doors are closed and locked.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
2. Press
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the
horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will flash once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parklamps will not flash.
Car finder
twice within 3 seconds. the horn will chirp and the turn lamps
Press
will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate your
vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to 3
(ON) to deactivate.
141
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Memory seats/adjustable pedals/mirrors (if equipped)
The remote entry system can also control the memory seat/adjustable
pedals/mirrors.
to automatically move the seat, adjustable pedals and mirrors to
Press
the desired memory position (the seat position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
Activating the memory seat feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, adjustable pedals and mirrors to the position
desired.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the lower-center portion of the
instrument panel which you would
like to associate with the seat and
Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory seat feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the lower-center portion of the instrument panel.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
142
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seats/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals feature, you can associate a remote entry
143
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
transmitter to each memory position using this procedure. The first
transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 1 settings, and the
second transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 2 settings.
How to program your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote keyless entry keypads and remote entry
transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this
procedure. Note: Do not press the brake pedal anytime during this
sequencing, as doing so will invalidate the procedure.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position and 3 (ON).
Note: The eighth turn must end in
the 3 (ON) position. The doors will
lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been
activated.
4. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that
this remote entry transmitter has been programmed.
5. Repeat Step 4 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position after you have
finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After
20 seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode. The
doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has
been exited.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Remote Keyless Entry system, the following items will
illuminate when the (unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Headlamps
• Parklamps
• Tail lamps
144
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and all vehicle doors are
closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON)
position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds.
Note: The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature
has been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.
145
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are
pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, 10 minutes after
if the dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is
left on.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized
dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats, mirrors and pedals
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
146
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
keycode has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If an incorrect code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this
time.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position.
147
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad
entry code.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-theft system
behave as follows:
• When the ignition is in the 1(OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the
SecuriLock娂 system is functioning as a theft deterrent.
148
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the
SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
not flash.
• When the igniton is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock娂 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
149
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3
(ON) position (maintain ignition in
the 3 (ON) position for at least one
second, but no more than ten
seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (ON)
position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the first
coded key from the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position (maintain
ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second but no more than
ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position
(maintain ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second, but no
more than ten seconds). This step will program your new key to a coded
key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
150
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Adjustable head restraints (if equipped)
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push control to lower head restraint.
151
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Full bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the release bar to move the
seat forward or backward. Ensure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull up on the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.
• Pull up on the lever located at
the side of the seat cushion to
recline the seatback and to return
the seat to the upright position.
40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull the handle on the side of the
seat up to recline the seat.
• Push down the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.
152
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
40/20/40 front seat armrest and console (if equipped)
To release the armrest, pull forward
on the strap and pull the armrest
down.
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest, lift
the latch to open the lid. The lid
cannot be opened in the upright
position.
Lift up armrest to return it to a
center seatback.
153
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Captain’s chair (if equipped)
• Lift the bar to move the seat
forward or rearward. Make sure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• To recline the seatback, pull the
release lever handle located on
the side of the seat up.
• Push down the lever (if
equipped) located at the bottom
of the seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
154
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press front to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Press rear to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Using the manual lumbar support
The lumbar support control is
located on the outboard side of the
seat
Turn the lumbar support clockwise
for more support.
Turn the lumbar support
counterclockwise for less support.
Heated seats (if equipped)
The heated seat control is located on the climate control panel.
155
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats, do the following (engine must be running):
Push
to activate; push
again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless the
control is pushed to deactivate. The system will reset after each ignition
key cycle.
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and adjustable pedals to
two programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position 1, move the
driver seat, mirrors and pedals (if
equipped) to the desired position
using the associated controls.
Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly
illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using control 2.
A position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the RUN position.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is in the RUN position.
A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control (if the transmitter is programmed to
a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code that
is programmed to a memory position.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for
more information on how to use the keypad, refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
156
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM WITH LOAD FLOOR (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be
flipped up into the seatback position.
Note: The Crew Cab rear 60/40 split bench seatback is not intended to
support a cargo load in the forward-folded position.
To fold the seatback down, pull
down the latch lever located on the
bottom seat back to fold the seat
back forward.
To flip the seat cushion up, pull
up on the lever located on the side
of the seat cushion to rotate the
cushion up until it locks into a
vertical storage position, gaining
access to the grocery hook located
on the underside of the driver-side
seat cushion. The maximum load is
25 lb. (11 kg).
Returning the seat to seating position
• Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage
position.
• Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
157
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To gain access to the cupholders
and tray, pull down on the armrest.
To gain access to the 60/40 load
floor, store the cushion in the
upright locked position. Pull up on
the straps located at the sides of the
load floor, and rotate forward until
resting on the carpet.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
158
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident.
159
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Vehicle sensitive mode
Combination lap and shoulder belts in normal retractor mode allow free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Belt sensitive mode
Combination lap and shoulder belts can also be made to lock manually by
quickly pulling on the shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
160
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed
except a booster in a front or rear outboard passenger seating position
(if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints
for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and rear outboard
seat belt systems must be checked by your authorized dealer to
verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is
still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked
for proper function.
161
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Workshop Manual. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard seat belt systems have a retractor assembly that is
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt retractor pretensioners at the
driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a
device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during
some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.
Front safety belt height adjustment
The front outboard seating positions are equipped with safety belt height
adjusters.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
162
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down. Release the
button and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
Center lap and shoulder belt (Regular Cab center seating
position/Super Cab and Crew Cab rear center seating positions)
Always use both the lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular
Cab center seating position or in the Super Cab/Crew Cab rear
center seating positions.
Regular Cabs with a center 20% seat or Crew Cabs with a rear
60/40 split bench
If you carry large cargo behind the seat or items that might damage or
soil the belt, detach the belt from the seat:
1. Release the mini-buckle by
inserting a key or safety belt tongue
into the slot.
163
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Insert the belt into the clip on the
back panel. Protect the stowed belt
if you carry cargo this may damage
or soil the belt.
If the belt has been disconnected to carry large objects behind the seat,
reconnect it as follows:
1. Remove the belt from the
stowage clip on the back panel.
2. Buckle the small tongue on the
end of the belt into the mini-buckle
on the driver’s side. The belt is now
ready for use. This mini-buckle
should stay buckled at all times
unless cargo-carrying makes it
necessary to detach the belt.
Safety belt with cinch tongue (Regular Cab center seating
positions and Super Cab/Crew Cab rear center seating positions)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
164
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue (Regular Cab center seating
positions and Super Cab/Crew Cab rear center seating positions)
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 8 km/h
(5 mph) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
your forward movement.
165
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
• 1st row center seating position on Super Cab and Crew Cab
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
166
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has been
turned to ON...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
while the safety belt indicator light activate.
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
before the ignition switch is turned activate.
to the ON position...
167
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare
events”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The more we
drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home.
“Belts are
We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
uncomfortable”
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder威
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
work”
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothes”
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
“The people I’m
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
with don’t wear
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
belts”
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
thrown clear”
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
168
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not sit on tope of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system
One-time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the Belt-Minder威 will be disabled for that ignition
cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature (Driver only)
Read Steps 1 - 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The Belt-Minder威 feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that the following conditions
are met:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission)
• the ignition switch is in the OFF position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in the OFF position (If the vehicle is
equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure)
While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder威, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
Belt-Minder威 activation and deactivation procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
169
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Step 3 must be completed within 60 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for 3 seconds.
• If Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of Step 3,
Belt-Minder威 will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status.
4. Within 7 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the light off, then
followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second
for 3 seconds again.
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
170
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and your
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
171
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
172
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect
the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow
attachment hardware may effect airbag deployment in a crash.
Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow
attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle.
Children and airbags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear facing infant
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
airbag is turned off. See Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch.
173
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
174
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
• one or more impact and safing sensors,
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
See your local authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by
qualified personnel.
175
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
An airbag ON/OFF switch
has been installed in this
vehicle. Before driving, always
look at the face of the switch to
be sure the switch is in the proper
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure
to put the switch in a proper
position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a
collision.
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in
OFF position while removing the
key.
2. When the ignition is turned to the
ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger
airbag is deactivated.
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your authorized dealer
immediately.
In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always
remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch.
176
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear facing infant
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
airbag is turned off.
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to On. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch
is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically designed to function together
with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your
airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was
designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a person who meets
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.
177
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and
child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be
transported in front, the passenger airbag must be turned OFF. This is
because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag
and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is
substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
178
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria.
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
179
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
180
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also may make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably, but make sure that the belt is
approximately centered on the shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
181
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
182
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
183
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
184
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg)
in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children
up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a
belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether
anchor. For more information on top tether straps and anchors, refer to
Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats, unless the passenger airbag On/Off switch is
turned off. See Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch in this chapter.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats
should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
airbag switch is turned off, See Passenger airbag on/off switch.
Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front
seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
185
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
186
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
187
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an
anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket
mounted to the body shell on the back panel.
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
• F-Series Regular Cab
• F-Series SuperCab
188
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• F-Series Crew Cab
Tether strap attachment
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
4. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before
installing the child seat. Refer to the Rear folding seat system with load
floor section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear
seats.
5. Remove tether cover.
6. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Front seats (Regular Cab)
189
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front seat (SuperCab)
• Rear seats (Crew Cab)
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
7. Refer to the Installing child safety seats with combination lap and
shoulder belts section of this chapter for further instructions to secure
the child safety seat.
8. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Tether strap attachment (rear SuperCab only)
There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to
three child safety seat tether straps.
These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber
bands. To access, reach below the back of the seat and pull tether loop
out of the rubber band securing it.
190
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.
2. Attach the strap hook onto the
loop behind an adjacent seating
position.
3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
191
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when you select the 4WD mode)
has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
192
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on shifting
procedures and maintenance can be
found in your Owner’s Guide. You
should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
193
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
194
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire Label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
195
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
196
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label.
197
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bars). For Dissimilar spare tires and Full-size matching spare
tires (see the Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information and Full-size
Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information sections for descriptions):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the or Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire
Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
198
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire inflation information
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting the air pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and
property.
199
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the illustration.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
200
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after 6 years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after 6 years due to aging even if it has not been used.
201
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and
also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford Dealer.
Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
202
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure you have the correct tire and wheel size
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead area again
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly
4. Use both eye and ear protection
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
203
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have your authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by your authorized
dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent
rear suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
204
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
(front tires at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
205
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• DRW – Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set/pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and
also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
206
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
207
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
208
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
209
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
210
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label
You will find a Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label
containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Refer
to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading — with
and without a trailer section.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
211
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Do not use snow chains on front tires of vehicles with 20” wheels
and tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
212
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label (vehicles exported outside the U.S. and Canada may
not have a Tire Label) on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
213
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
214
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight
rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
215
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
216
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x
150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
217
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1,400 – 1,100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 – (2 x 220) –
(12 x 100) = 1,400 – 440 – 1,200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1,400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1,400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this owner guide.
218
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Note: The trailer towing charts in this section apply to vehicles equipped
with gasoline engines; for vehicles equipped with diesel engines, refer to
your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement.
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth wheel trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the
following charts.
To calculate your maximum trailer weight:
For pickup trucks: Take curb weight, hitch hardware and the driver’s
weight, then subtract them from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series,
engine, transmission and drive axle ratio (refer to the chart/table in the
following text). This calculation will give you the maximum trailer
weight possible for your vehicle.
For chassis cabs and pickup trucks with aftermarket equipment:
Weigh your vehicle at a certified scale and subtract this actual curb
weight, hitch hardware, and the driver’s weight from the GCWR listed for
your vehicle series, engine, transmission and drive axle ratio (refer to
the chart/table in the following text). This calculation will give you the
maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle.
The weight of all additional cargo and passengers must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight calculated above.
Further trailer/hitch restrictions and limitations exist depending on the
type of trailer and hitch used. These additional maximum trailer weight
and tongue load limitations are listed in the chart/table that follows the
listing of GCWRs.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. Refer to
Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for the transmission fluid temperature information.
219
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Do not exceed the GCWR listed for your vehicle on the following
chart/table, or the GVWR, GAWR or tire ratings specified on the Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended trailer
weight which exceeds the limit of the vehicle’s GCWR, GVWR,
GAWR or tire ratings could result in engine damage, transmission
damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Engine
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
5.4L
6.8L
Maximum GCWR - lb. (kg.)
Rear axle
Manual
Automatic
ratio
transmission
transmission
F–250 Pick-up
3.73
15000 (6804)
16000 (7257)
4.10
17000 (7711)
18000 (8165)
4.10
20000 (9072)
21000 (9525)
4.30
22000 (9979)
22500 (10206)
F–350 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) Pick-up
3.73
15000 (6804)
16000 (7257)
4.10
17000 (7711)
18000 (8165)
4.10
20000 (9072)
21000 (9525)
4.30
22000 (9979)
23000 (10433)
F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) Pick-up
4.10
17500 (7938)
18500 (8391)
4.10
20500 (9299)
21500 (9752)
4.30
22500 (10206)
23000 (10433)
F–350 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) Chassis Cab
3.73
15000 (6804)
16000 (7257)
4.10
17000 (7711)
18000 (8165)
4.10
20000 (9072)
21000 (9525)
220
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Engine
5.4L
6.8L
6.8L
Maximum GCWR - lb. (kg.)
Rear axle
Manual
ratio
transmission
F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) Chassis
3.73
15000 (6804)
4.10
17500 (7938)
4.10
20500 (9299)
4.30
22500 (10206)
F–450 Chassis Cab/F–550
4.88/5.38
26000 (11793)
Automatic
transmission
Cab
16500 (7484)
18500 (8391)
21500 (9752)
23000 (10433)
26000 (11793)
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
ON PICK-UP TRUCKS, the trailer hitch provided on this vehicle
enhances collision protection for the fuel system. DO NOT
REMOVE!
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% for
conventional towing or 15%-25% fifth-wheel towing of the total weight of
the trailer is on the tongue.
Integrated hitch rating
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of
operation:
• Weight carrying - requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight distributing - requires an aftermarket weight distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
221
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitch Type
6.8L DRW
Pickup
2.5” ID without
adapter
(requires 2.5”
drawbar)
6.8L DRW
Pickup
2.5” ID with
adapter
(requires 2”
drawbar)
All SRW Pickups
and 5.4L DRW
Pickups
2” receiver
Weight carrying
Maximum
Gross Trailer
Weight — lb.
(kg)
8000 (3629)
Maximum
Tongue Weight
— lb. (kg)
800 (363)
Weight
distributing
15000 (6804)
1500 (680)
Weight carrying
6000 (2721)
600 (272)
Weight
distributing
12500 (5670)
1250 (567)
Weight carrying
6000 (2721)
600 (272)
Weight
distributing
12500 (5670)
1250 (567)
Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the
limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural
damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Weight distributing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 1⁄2” (13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 2.
222
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Adjusting a weight distributing hitch so the rear bumper of the
vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the
weight distributing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
If you own a trailer with a hydraulic brake system, do not
connect the trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. The vehicle’s brake system is only designed to
carry the appropriate amount of brake fluid for the vehicle alone.
Connecting a hydraulic trailer braking system could adversely affect
your vehicle’s braking performance.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer
Brake Controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes (one to four axles)
and not hydraulic surge or electric-over-hydraulic types. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are
adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made.
223
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The TBC user interface consists of
the following:
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons
will adjust the TBC’s power output
to the trailer brakes (in 0.5
increments). The GAIN setting can
be increased to a maximum of 10.0
or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no
trailer braking). Pressing and
holding a button will raise or lower
the setting continuously.
2. Trailer connection indicator: This lamp indicates trailer electrical
connection status.
• When a successful trailer connection is detected, the indicator will be
green.
• If the electrical connection is lost, the indicator will flash red. If the
connection is lost while the vehicle is stationary, the indicator will turn
off after 30 seconds. If the connection is lost while the vehicle is
moving, the indicator will flash until the ignition is turned off, then on
again or if there is a reconnection.
• If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on,
pressing a GAIN adjustment button will display the GAIN setting.
Sliding the manual control will display the GAIN setting, OUTPUT bar
graph and light the trailer indicator red.
3. GAIN setting display: Shows the current GAIN setting. This will
illuminate when a trailer is connected, flash if the trailer becomes
disconnected, or remain off if no trailer is connected.
4. OUTPUT bar graph: When the vehicle’s brake pedal is pushed, or
when the manual control is activated, green bar indicators will illuminate
to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to
the brake pedal or manual control input.
5. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
224
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Stop Lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate
both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except
the Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing
condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at
speeds of approximately 20 – 25 mph (30 – 40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally, and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook-up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the trailer connection
indicator will illuminate green on the TBC and the GAIN setting display
will illuminate.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease the
GAIN setting to the desired starting point. (A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.)
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20 – 25 mph (30 – 40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock-up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may
not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Explanation of instrument cluster messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center. These
messages, accompanied by a single chime, will be displayed when the
225
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TBC determines a malfunction in the trailer connection, TBC system, or
in the trailer. These messages are listed below:
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped with message center) or
CHECK TRAILER (if equipped with mini message center): This
message is displayed when a trailer connection was determined and then
a disconnection, either intentionally or unintentionally, has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle. It is also displayed if a trailer fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message is also
displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected.
TBC FAULT: This message is displayed in response to faults sensed by
the TBC. In the event this message is seen, please take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: The TBC is capable of determining
certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. These
faults do not mean there is anything wrong with the TBC. This message
is displayed when one of the following faults has occurred:
• Short circuit on the electric brake output wire: If the TRAILER
FAULT message is displayed with no trailer connected, the problem is
with the vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector in the
bumper. If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the
problem is related to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short
to voltage (i.e., pulled pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or
trailer brakes drawing too much current.
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
• Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
• Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
• The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
226
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock-up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer
and tow vehicle.
• The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup.
Therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may
not function at full performance.
• When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC Output is disabled and the
display is shut down. Reactivation of the ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4
(ON) will awaken the TBC module.
• The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item. Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
• Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5,000 lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 km) of trailer towing and don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, activate the Tow/Haul
feature. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional
227
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
information, refer to the Understanding the shift positions of the
5–speed automatic transmission section in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. If the spare tire is different in size (diameter and/or width), tread
type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
other than the road tires on your vehicle, your spare tire is considered
“temporary”. Consult information on the spare Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label for limitations when using.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing safety tips
General
• Ensure that the trailer, safety chains and 7–pin electrical connectors
are securely fastened.
• Make sure the truck receiver, draw bar, and coupler are properly
connected and adjusted.
• Check rear view and side mirrors for proper visibility especially when
towing trailer wider than the truck.
• When towing, operate the vehicle at lower speeds than you would
when not towing a trailer. The likelihood of trailer sway is greater at
higher speeds.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if not already so
equipped. Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and
Capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the
proper axle lubricant. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lubricant used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of
a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles of towing be done at no
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full-throttle starts.
• When turning make wide turns to allow trailer tires to properly clear
any obstacles.
• Be prepared for trailer sway due to buffeting when larger vehicles
pass in either direction.
228
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Loading
• Keep the center-of-gravity low for best handling.
• Trailer loads should be evenly distributed front to back and left to
right.
• The load distribution within the trailer should be such that 10%–15%
of the trailer weight is on the hitch. (15%–25% for fifth-wheel or
gooseneck towing.)
• Never exceed truck, trailer, receiver, ball, tongue, tire or coupler
loading recommendations.
Braking
• The trailer brakes must be inspected and serviced at intervals
specified by the manufacturer. This includes the shoes, drum and
trailer brake magnets.
• Electric brakes also require periodic adjustment to keep the shoes
properly spaced. If the brakes get hot when driving or if they will not
hold, chances are that they need adjustment.
• Anticipate the need to stop; allow much more distance and time to
stop than normal.
• Do not apply the trailer brakes for extended periods of time as they
can overheat and lose effectiveness.
Backing up
• Practice backing up, particularly if you are a novice. Turn the steering
wheel to the right to move the trailer’s rear end to the right.
• Sharp steering movements may cause the trailer to jackknife or go out
of control.
Tires
• All trailer tires should be of the same size, and construction.
• Select tires that meet the trailer loading requirements.
• Always check tow vehicle and trailer tire pressure before towing.
Launching or retrieving a boat
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
229
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses
caused by water entering into your trailer’s electrical wiring.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked
unless a leak is suspected.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to
ensure that your transmission is not damaged.
Transmission
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Drivetrain
configuration
4x2
Requirements for neutral
towing
Remove driveshaft1
4x4 with
manual-shift
transfer case
Transmission in Neutral;
Transfer case in N
(Neutral); Hublocks set to
FREE2
Transmission in neutral;
Remove rear driveshaft;
Transfer case set to 2WD4;
Hublocks set to AUTO2, 3
4x4 with
electronic-shift
transfer case
1
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a
qualified technician. See your local authorized dealer for driveshaft
removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft
can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and
internal transmission components.
2
Always make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position.
3
To ensure the automatic hub locks are unlocked, cycle the hub lock dial
from AUTO to LOCK and back to AUTO.
4
To ensure the transfer case is in 2WD, turn the ignition key on, then
shift to 2WD. The 4x4 HIGH light or 4x4 LOW light should not be
illuminated in the instrument cluster; if either one is illuminated, the
transfer case is not in 2WD.
230
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, shuts off the engine
and all accessories/locks the steering
wheel, gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
2. ACC, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running. This position also unlocks
the steering wheel.
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
231
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following
starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if
your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, refer to Starting the
engine in your 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).
232
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.
• Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
233
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it will have a
computer assisted cranking system. This feature assists in starting the
engine. If the ignition key is turned to the 4 (START) position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the engine may continue
cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in
a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least
three hours before starting the
vehicle. The heater can be plugged
in the night before starting the
vehicle. The plug for the block
heater is exposed in the front of the
vehicle, beneath the grille. Vehicles
equipped with a gasoline engine have the plug exposed on the driver
side of the vehicle; vehicles equipped with a Diesel engine have the plug
exposed on the passenger side of the vehicle.
234
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by your authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by your authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
235
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
Pull the release lever to release the
parking brake. To prevent the pedal
from releasing too quickly, place
your left foot on the parking brake
pedal, then pull the release lever,
making sure the pedal fully releases.
You may want to pull the release
lever again to make sure the parking
brake is fully released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the engine
may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking
brake is set. It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this
operation.
236
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If you’re parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the
vehicle may be overloaded.
TRACTION CONTROL姟 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control娂 system. This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control娂 operation,
the traction control light will
illuminate and the engine will not
“rev-up” when you push further on
the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior and should be no
reason for concern. Also, if traction control is on when the vehicle is put
into four-wheel drive mode (if equipped), the traction control system will
be automatically disabled. Traction control operation will resume when
the vehicle is placed back into two-wheel drive mode.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction Control娂
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
237
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The Traction Control娂 switch,
located on the instrument panel to
the left of the climate control
system, has an indicator light that
illuminates when the system is off.
The Traction Control娂 system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned off and on. The
Traction Control娂 system should normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction Control娂 system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control娂 button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than three to five seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the FULL COLD mark on the dipstick).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer.
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid.
Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service
by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the FULL HOT
mark on the dipstick, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new
fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing
238
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and trucks
handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid
sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.
Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload your vehicle
and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower speeds, avoiding
abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over loading or loading the
vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute
to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
239
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (ON) position and the brake pedal is not depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of the P (Park) position with
the ignition in the 3 (ON) position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the
ignition key to 1 (OFF/LOCK), then
remove the key. Locate the access
cover plate for the brake-shift
interlock override. It is located on
top of the steering column shroud.
2. Apply the brake. Use a tool (or a
small screwdriver) to pry out the
access cover. Insert the tool into the
access hole and slide the white
override button towards the left.
Move the gear shift lever into N
(Neutral) while holding the white
override disc towards the left.
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
240
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
241
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
242
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss
of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or D (Drive).
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
243
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
R 1 3 D
L 2 4
Using the clutch
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased
shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the
transmission. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t
interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch
pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These
actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended shift speeds
Do not overspeed the engine when going downhill or steep grades. If
equipped, use the tachometer and do not allow engine speed to exceed
the redline area. Operating the engine beyond the recommended speeds
can cause severe engine damage.
244
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Shift according to the following shift speed charts:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
6-speed transmission
Shift from:
Transfer case position1 (if equipped)
2H or 4H
4L
LO-1
5 mph (8 km/h)
2 mph (3 km/h)
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
6 mph (10 km/h)
2-3
22 mph (35 km/h)
9 mph (14 km/h)
3-4
30 mph (48 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
15 mph (24 km/h)
4 - D (Overdrive)
Maximum downshift speeds1
6-speed transmission
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)2
2H or 4H
4L
45 mph (72 km/h)
16 mph (26 km/h)
D (Overdrive) - 4
4-3
35 mph (56 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
3-2
20 mph (32 km/h)
8 mph (13 km/h)
2-1
5 mph (8 km/h)
2 mph (3 km/h)
1-LO
Only shift to LO when at a stop.
1
Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles.
2
Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from
(Overdrive).
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
245
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Turn the ignition off.
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
246
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS may have reduced
performance or an increased chance
of false detection if the tailgate is
not locked and in the upright position. If the tailgate is down, the RSS
tone may be heard intermittently or continuously. The tone may also be
heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gearshift lever is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is on.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the
RSS off, the ignition must be on,
and the gear selector in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the
control will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator
light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure
in the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is
pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
247
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
traction is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.
• For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully
engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position
(both set to LOCK or both set to FREE). To engage LOCK,
turn the hub locks completely clockwise; to disengage the hubs
(FREE), turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise.
• Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover the
4x4 manual hub lock. These ornaments must be removed to access
the manual hub locks.
Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD System, and the
instrument panel control is moved to 4X4 LOW while the vehicle
is moving above 5 mph (8 km/h), the system will not engage and
no damage will occur to the 4WD system. Before 4X4 LOW can be
248
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
engaged, the vehicle speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) with
the brake pedal depressed and the transmission in N (Neutral). If
your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the clutch
pedal also must be depressed.This vehicle is equipped with a
non-synchronous low range gearset which will not allow the
transfer case to shift into 4X4 LOW if vehicle speed is above
5 mph (8 km/h). It is recommended that a shift to 4X4 LOW is
performed while the vehicle is rolling at a speed below 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
• is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
• auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
• automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
• For proper operation, make
sure that each hub is fully
engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both set to LOCK or both
set to AUTO). To engage LOCK, turn the hub locks completely
clockwise; to engage AUTO, turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.
4WD system indicator lights
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• 4x4 HIGH - momentarily
4x4
illuminates after the engine is
HIGH
started. Illuminates when 4H (4x4
High) or 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged.
249
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• 4x4 LOW – momentarily
illuminates when the ignition is
turned to the ON position.
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged.
4x4
LOW
Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4x4 system (if equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to
shift into and out of 4x4 modes. It is recommended to allow the
vehicle to roll at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) when shifting.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages.
This is normal. In order to reduce engagement noise, it is recommended
that all shifts be performed at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2H (2WD) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4x4 High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
N (Neutral) – Only used when towing the vehicle.
4L (4x4 Low) – For low-speed off-road applications that require extra
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
Sends power to front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
Shifting from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4 High)
Engage the locking hubs by rotating
the hub lock control from FREE to
LOCK, then move the transfer case
lever from 2H (2WD) to 4H (4x4
High) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator
arrows on the hub are aligned,
and that both hubs are set to
LOCK.
250
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Do not shift into 4H (4x4
High) with the rear wheels
slipping.
2H
4H
N
4L
Shifting from 4H (4x4 High) to 2H (2WD)
Move the transfer case lever to 2H
2H
(2WD) at a stop or a vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
4H
With the vehicle at complete stop,
N
disengage the locking hubs
(optional) by rotating the hub lock
4L
control from LOCK to FREE.
• For proper operation, make
sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned, and
that both hubs are set to FREE
Shifting from 4H (4x4 High) to 4L (4x4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with
a manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
2H
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L
(4x4 Low).
4H
4. If the shift lever does not, or only
N
partially moves to the 4L (4x4 Low)
position, perform a shift with the
4L
transmission in N (Neutral) (or
clutch pedal depressed) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h). This will ensure the
transfer case is fully engaged into 4L (4x4 Low).
Shifting from 4L (4x4 Low) to 4H (4x4 High) or 2H (2WD)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
2. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with
a manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
251
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
2H
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H
(4x4 High) or 2H (2WD).
4H
4. If the transfer case will not
N
engage into 4H (4x4 High) or 2H
(2WD), perform a shift with the
4L
transmission in N (Neutral) (or
clutch pedal depressed) and the
vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H (2WD) with the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage
the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK
to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backwards.
This position should only be used
2H
when towing the vehicle.
4H
N
4L
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF) 4x4 system
(if equipped)
Positions of the electronic shift system
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
2WD – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only.
4x4 HIGH – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to front
and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
252
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
4x4 LOW – For low-speed off-road applications that require extra power
such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water. Sends
power to front and rear wheels. This mode is not intended for use on
dry pavement.
Shifting from 2WD to 4x4 HIGH
Rotate the 4x4 control to the 4x4
HIGH position at speeds up to
55 mph (88 km/h).
• The electronic shift 4x4
system is designed to engage
4x4 HIGH when the vehicle is
moving. If shifted to 4x4
HIGH while at complete stop,
4x4 may not engage and the
4x4 indicator may not
illuminate until the vehicle is
allowed to move at a speed above 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 2WD
Rotate the 4x4 control to 2WD at
any forward speed. Disengagement
of the transfer case and front hubs
may be delayed due to torque bind
which is caused by driving on dry
hard surfaces or performing tight
turns while using the 4x4 system.
• You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage
your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the
system to immediately disengage.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 4x4 LOW
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). If the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission, also depress the clutch pedal.
253
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
4. Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4
LOW position.
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
4x4 LOW indicator light illuminates.
6. If the 4x4 LOW indicator light
does not illuminate within 15
seconds, allow the vehicle to move
at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
then repeat steps 2 through 5 while
the vehicle is rolling before
reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer.
Shifting from 4x4 LOW to 4x4 HIGH or 2WD
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
4. Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4
HIGH or 2WD position.
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
4x4 LOW indicator light shuts off.
6. If the 4x4 LOW indicator light
does not shut off within 15
seconds, allow the vehicle to move
at a speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
then repeat steps 2 through 5 while
the vehicle is rolling before
reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
254
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
255
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument
Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
256
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance
257
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You
should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
258
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
259
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
manually shift to a lower gear. Your
vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle
is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
260
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service,
and pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from
the powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition,
there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the
vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket
PTO system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application,
is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are qualified for use as a stationary power
source, within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout
Book, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford
Truck Body Builders Advisory Service.
Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous
operation as a stationary power source, due to the potential for the
normal venting of fuel vapors. For stationary PTO operation of extended
duration (beyond 10 minutes), diesel engine is recommended. Further
consult your aftermarket PTO installer, since the duration of operation
limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of.
261
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty F-Series used for snow removal
include a snow plow package option.
Installing the snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, Snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an “Alterer’s
Label” on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg) GVWR or
less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment,
such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the
vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding
this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional
safety certification responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve
Capacity (FARC) is added for customer convenience.
262
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature uneven
tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for
additional information.
• Snowplowing with vehicles equipped with a diesel engine may result in
engine overheating in highway driving with snowplow blade raised
unless equipped with the special engine cooling fan clutch that is
included with a snow plow package option.
Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached
Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at
least 500 miles (800 km).
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance
information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals.
Snowplowing with your airbag-equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
263
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible airbag deployment.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your Ford
or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect
the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.
Transmission operation while plowing
Operate the vehicle with the automatic transmission gearshift lever in
the D (Overdrive) position and Tow/Haul OFF.
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH when plowing larger areas or light
snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat.
Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument
Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
264
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the period of five years or 60,000 miles (100,000 km), whichever
occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and six years or 70,000
miles (110,000 km) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $100 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
265
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
266
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
This switch is located on the
passenger’s side of the instrument
panel. Open the front passenger
door and remove the small access
panel
267
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The switch has a red button on top
of it.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to off.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
268
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
—
Yellow
—
Brown
—
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located in the
passenger’s footwell. Remove the
panel cover to access the fuses.
269
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove the fuse panel cover, pull
the panel toward you. When the
clips of the panel disengage, let the
panel fall easily.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller
tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse
panel before reconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
270
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
30A
10A
6
7
8
9
10
11
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Family Entertainment System (FES)
Not used (spare)
Keypad illumination, Brake-Shift Interlock
(BSI)
Turn signals
Left headlamp (Low beam)
Right headlamp (Low beam)
Interior lighting
Cargo lamp
Not used
271
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
7.5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
26
27
10A
20A
28
29
30
31
32
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
33
10A
34
5A
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Power mirror switch, Driver power seat
(Memory)
Not used (spare)
Upfitter relay #3 feed
Climate control head
Upfitter Relay #4 Feed
All lock motor feeds
Heated seat relay feed
Not used (spare)
Adjustable pedals, Datalink
Fog lamp relay feed, Cornering lamps
Park lamp relay feed
High beam headlight relay feed
Horn relay feed
Power telescoping mirror switch Demand
lamps - underhood and illuminated visor
(battery saver)
Cluster
Ignition switch feed, Passenger
compartment fuses 28, 43 and 45, Engine
compartment starter relay coil #57 (Diesel
engine), Engine compartment starter relay
diode (gasoline engines)
Radio
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Compass
Restraints Control Module (RCM),
Passenger Airbag Deactivation Indicator
Trailer tow brake controller, Trailer tow
battery charge relay coil
Not used (spare)
272
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Reverse Sensing System (RSS), 4x4
module, 4x4 solenoid, Traction control
switch, Tow/Haul switch (Diesel engine)
5A
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
transceiver, Cluster control
10A
Dual automatic or Manual climate control,
PTC control
20A
Subwoofer
20A
Radio
20A
4x4 module, Satellite radio module
15A
Radio, Electrochromatic rear view mirror,
Lock switch illumination
10A
Heated seat relay coil, Upfitter switch
relay coils, Heated mirror relay coil
10A
Fuel tank selector switch, 4x4 module
10A
Run/Start customer access feed (PTO)
5A
Front wiper logic, Blower motor relay coil
7.5A
Not used (spare)
30A Circuit Power windows, Moonroof, Power Sliding
Breaker
Backlite
Relay
Delayed accessory
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
273
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
Relay
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Relay
Relay
—
30A*
40A*
30A*
30A*
40A*
20A*
20A*
15A**
5A **
14
15
16
—
—
Relay
Power Distribution Box Description
Blower motor/Variable blower control
(Dual Zone Climate Control)
Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly (ESOF) Lo-Hi
Heater mirror
Not used
Trailer Brake Controller (TBC)
ABS module (Pump)
Upfitter auxiliary switch #1
Upfitter auxiliary switch #2
ABS module (Coil)
Cigar lighter
Instrument panel power point
Brake On/Off (BOO) relay feed
Brake switch, Brake switch relay coil, SJB
module, 4x4 module
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch
274
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
17
18
Fuse Amp
Rating
Relay
Relay
19
Relay
20
21
22
Relay
Relay
Relay
23
24
25
26
27
15A**
40A*
—
30A*
50A*
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
20A*
30A*
10A**
15A**
20A**
20A**
25A**
5A**
10A**
37
10A**
38
—
Power Distribution Box Description
Not used
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM), Fuel
injectors (Gasoline engines), Diesel Fuel
Control Module (DFCM) (Diesel engine)
Back-up lamps, Reverse Sensing System
(RSS), Engine compartment fuse 63
Trailer stop/turn (Left)
Trailer stop/turn (Right)
Stop lamps, Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL), TBC, Customer access
Heater mirror
Blower motor relay
Not used
ESOF relay lo-hi
Glow Plug Control Module (GPCM) #1
(Diesel engine only)
Heated mirror relay
Passenger power seat
A/C clutch relay
Power fold mirror relay
Fuel pump relay
Back-up lamp relay
Trailer stop/turn relay
ESOF relay coils
Gasoline engines: Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) keep alive power, Canister
vent
Diesel engine: Engine Control Module
(ECM) keep alive power
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
(Diesel engine only)
Not used
275
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Fuse Amp
Rating
50A*
30A*
20A*
30A*
20A*
30A*
30A*
40A*
50A*
30A*
30A*
30A*
51
52
53
—
—
Relay
54
55
56
57
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
58
59
Relay
Relay
60
61
62
63
64
65
Diode
Diode
Diode
15A**
5A**
—
Power Distribution Box Description
ECM power (Diesel engine)
Starter relay
Power point (Center console - Front)
Trailer park lamp relay
Power point (Center console - Rear)
Trailer battery charge relay
Driver power seat or Memory module
Run/Start relay
GPCM #2 (Diesel engine only)
ESOF relay hi-lo
Wiper motor
PCM relay coil, PCM relay (Gasoline
engines only)
Not used
Not used
PCM power bus (Fuses 68, 70, 72, 74, 76)
(Diesel engine only)
Starter solenoid
Trailer tow park lamps
Trailer tow battery charge
Power Distribution Box (PDB) bus (fuses
67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 77)
SJB Run /Start bus (Fuses 29–37, 46)
ESOF hi-lo
PCM power bus (Fuses 68, 70, 72, 74, 76)
(Gasoline engines only)
Starter relay (Gasoline engines only)
A/C clutch
Fuel pump
Trailer tow back-up lamps
Mirror marker lamps
Not used
276
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
66
67
68
69
70
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
—
10A**
71
5A**
72
15A**
73
74
—
20A**
75
76
5A**
20A**
77
10A**
* Cartridge fuses ** Mini
Power Distribution Box Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Gasoline engines: A/C clutch relay coil,
Refrigerant Containment Switch, Heated
PCV
Diesel engine: A/C clutch relay coil,
Clutch switch, Fuel pump cooler, A/C
cycle pressure switch
Fuel pump relay diode, PCM/ECM
Run/Start power
Gasoline engines: Ignition coils
Diesel engine: Engine TCM
Not used
Gasoline engines: VPWR: HEGO, CMS,
MAFS, EVMV, CMCV, VCT, IMTV
Diesel engine: VPWR: Engine loads
Back-up relay coil power
Gasoline engines: VPWR: PCM
Diesel engine: VPWR: ECM
ABS module logic
fuses
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is
different in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed rating
and tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still rated
for your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR).
277
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
278
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with
a temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above
50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being changed.
279
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Refer to the instruction sheet (located in the glove box) for detailed tire
change instructions.
Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
• Automatic transmission: Place
gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Manual transmission: Place
gearshift lever in R (Reverse).
• Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
(ESOF) 4x4: Place transfer case
in 4x4 HIGH or 4x4 LOW before
turning off the engine.
• Manual shift transfer case 4x4: Place transfer case in 4H or 4L.
Location of the spare tire and tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, jack and associated tools,
refer to the following table for their locations:
Tool
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only)
Jack
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug
wrench extension (only available
on Dual Rear Wheel [DRW]
vehicles) and wheel chock (only
available on Single Rear Wheel
[SRW] vehicles equipped with a
diesel engine)
Key, spare tire lock, jack
instruction sheet
280
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Location
Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Regular cab and Crew Cab:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
Super Cab: Under rear bench seat
on passenger side
Regular cab: Fastened to floor
behind driver seat
Super Cab: Fastened to floor
under rear seat
Crew Cab: Fastened to floor
behind rear seat at driver side
In the glove box
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
• one handle extension and two
typical extensions. To assemble,
align button with hole and slide
parts together. To disconnect,
depress button and pull apart.
• one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
square end of jack handle.
• Vehicles equipped with dual
rear wheels, insert the lug
wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.
2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A)
to the jack handle (B).
281
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Fully insert the jack handle (with
one extension) through the bumper
hole and into the guide tube. The
key and lock will engage with a
slight push and counterclockwise
turn. Some resistance will be felt
when turning the jack handle
assembly.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until you
can slide the tire rearward and the
cable is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
1. Turn engine off and block the
wheel that is diagonally opposite of
the flat tire using the wheel chock,
if equipped. If the vehicle is a
4x4, lock the manual hub on the
wheel.
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To help prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake
is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
282
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The following steps apply to F–250/F–350 Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) vehicles only:
5. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
6. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
• Front (4x2)
• Front driver side (4x4)
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential.
283
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point. Place the jack directly
under the axle.
• Rear
Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
284
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles. If
replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve stem
must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve stem
must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to step 19.
The following steps apply to F–350 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and
F–450/F–550 vehicles only:
11. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.
12. Position the jack according to
the following guides:
• Front (4x2): F–350 DRW
Note: Place jack directly under
I-beam.
285
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Front driver side (4x4): F–350
DRW
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto
the flat area on the outboard side of
the differential housing.
• Front passenger side (4x4): F-350
DRW
Note: View shown from the rear of
the vehicle to clearly identify the
jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under
axle and inboard of the radius arm
so that the jack clears the radius
arm.
• Front: F–450/F–550
286
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Rear: F-350 DRW
• Rear: F-450/F-550
13. Insert the jack handle into the
pump linkage.
14. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.
Hydraulic jacks are equipped
with a pressure release valve
that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack’s rated capacity.
15. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
16. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
17. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more
controlled rate of descent.
287
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The following steps apply to all vehicles:
18. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
8–lug nut torque sequence
10–lug nut torque sequence
19. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire if the vehicle
is equipped with a spare tire carrier.
Note: Do not stow the Harley-Davidson flat tire and wheel using the
spare tire winch mechanism; store the flat in the bed of the truck.
20. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is
securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving.
21. Unblock the wheels.
288
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located in the glove box.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
289
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
N•m
M14 x 1.5
150
200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut. Do not
apply motor oil to the wheel nut
threads or the wheel stud threads.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
290
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
291
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
292
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
293
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
294
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
295
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed using
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, a wheel
lift may be used to lift the rear of the vehicle so long as, depending on
vehicle configurations, the following preparations are met:
• On Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) vehicles, the 4x4 control is
turned to the 2WD position prior to towing.
• On manual-shift transfer case vehicles, the front wheel hub locks are
in the FREE position prior to towing.
Note: Towing an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the front wheels on the ground
without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic
transmission.
296
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Towing an a 4x2 or an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the rear wheels on
the ground for more than 50 miles (80 km) and/or in excess of 35 mph
(56 km/h) may cause damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: On Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) vehicles, an outer rear wheel must be
removed prior to using a wheel lift wrecker.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
297
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
298
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.
only).
299
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
300
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
301
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
302
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
303
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
304
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
305
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. Use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax, ZC-53-A, which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
306
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
307
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 5.4L V8 gasoline engine
• 6.8L V10 gasoline engine
308
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean and damp, white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry, white
cotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner
(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
309
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.
2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [In
Canada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wiped
area and spread around evenly.
3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room temperature for
30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
310
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH F–250 AND
F–350 CREWCAB)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
For King Ranch F-250 and F-350 CrewCab leather seats, refer to
separate section in this chapter.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating on the seat.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-250 AND F-350
CREWCAB ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading
of the material.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap. If the leather
cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution, the
leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product
“Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner” and a 3M “Type T” scrubbing pad.
311
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING
(5464).
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the
leather.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Note: Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline,
especially the driveshaft and interfacing components. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
312
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of
equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53–A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
313
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
314
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch located
below the passenger side of the
grille, next to the headlamp. Slide
the handle to release the auxiliary
latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
315
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Refer to the 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.
5.4L V8 gasoline engines
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Battery
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Air filter assembly
10. Power distribution box
316
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
6.8L V10 gasoline engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Battery
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Air filter assembly
10. Power distribution box
317
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water
repellant-type fluid or bug wash as
this may cause a
squeaking/chattering noise, streaking
or smearing. Refer to Maintenance
Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (4°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
3. Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
318
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
the windshield; refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
5. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
319
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 5.4L/6.8L engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
320
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
321
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
322
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Automatic transmission operation in the
Driving chapter.
Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
323
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
RN
LE
A
TU
D
RE
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage (kilometer) intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50
coolant and distilled water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F
(-36°C). Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or
antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester,
014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained at the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
324
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the
coolant reservoir.
• Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1.
325
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets may darken
the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to
golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44–D, or DEX-COOL威 brand with the
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product such as
DEX-COOL威 brand with your factory filled coolant can result in
degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “COLD FILL RANGE” level. For all other vehicles which
have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary
to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle
with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
326
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” on the reservoir.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this section.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the
Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section of your
6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
327
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
328
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The message center will indicate
the engine is overheating.
• The Check engine indicator
) will illuminate.
(
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
329
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
330
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
331
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling you vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Fuel filler cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks.
If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on and stays on after you start
the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
332
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
333
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the fuel recommendations in the Choosing the
right fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
334
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon
may be required.
• The Check engine indicator (
) may come on. For more
information on the Check engine indicator, refer to the Instrument
Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
Product Specifications and Capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition off prior to refueling, an error in the reading
will result if the engine is left running.
335
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Use the same filling rate setting (low-medium-high) each time the
tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
336
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance Product
Specifications and Capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle’s scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
337
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
338
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Check engine light (
), charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
indicator to illuminate.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel - the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel - the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
339
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Driving through deep water - the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
indicator should stay off
other temporary malfunctions present, the
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
If the
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel
with the
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
indicator is on, refer to the
the on-board diagnostics system. If the
description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument
Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the
indicator on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON威 ATF.
340
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Gasoline engine shown; diesel
engine similar. Refer to
Identifying components in the
engine compartment in the
6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner Guide Supplement.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°F–80°F
(-7°C–25°C):
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the MIN and MAX range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range. Be sure to put the
cap back on the reservoir.
341
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
• Vacuum boost system
• Hydroboost system
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the
performance of your brake system could be compromised; seek service
from your authorized dealer immediately.
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications. Refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
342
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For
MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION, contact a physician or
Poison Control Center immediately; on Ford-Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673 (FORD). Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant or rise slightly. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid
level to the step in the reservoir.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
343
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
344
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the
Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
345
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Automatic transmission fluid filter (if equipped)
The TorqShift automatic
transmission may be equipped with
a serviceable external fluid filter
mounted under the transmission bell
housing as shown in the illustration.
TorqShift-equipped vehicles which do not have the externally mounted
filter will have the transmission fluid filter located inside the transmission
bottom pan. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for
service intervals for automatic transmission fluid and each transmission
filter type. See your authorized dealer for replacement.
346
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Maintenance
Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter.
347
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Maintenance
Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped
with grease fittings, lubrication will be necessary. Refer to the
replacement universal joint manufacturer’s recommendation for
lubrication type and maintenance intervals.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
348
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the 6.0/6.4 Liter
Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Loosen clamp and disconnect
sensor.
2. Release three retainer clamps.
3. Pull air filter cover toward passenger side of vehicle and up to release
the tabs. Lift air filter element up and out of housing.
The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new
air filter.
4. Install a new air filter element into the tray assembly.
349
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Return air filter cover to original
position making sure the four tabs
are engaged and secure the three
clamps. Tighten clamp on air tube
and reconnect sensor.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 engines
Air filter element
FA-1883
Fuel filter
FG-1011
Oil filter
FL-820-S
1
PCV valve
Battery (Standard)
BXT-65-650
Battery (Optional)
BXT-65-750
2
Spark plugs-platinum
3, 4
Remote Automatic Transmission Filter
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in the scheduled maintenance information and is essential to
the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
350
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
3
Also available with 6.4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-176.
4
Also available with 6.4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-175.
351
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
352
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Engine coolant - 5.4L
V8 engine with A/C2
Brake fluid (and clutch
fluid, if equipped)
Rear axle - F-450/550
(Dana S110/S130)
Rear axle - F-350
(DANA 80)
Rear axle - F-250/350
(10.50 inch axle)1
Spindle bearing
Front axle
Item
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
5.8 pints (2.8L)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
XY-80W-90–QL /
Premium Rear Axle
WSP-M2C197–A
Lubricant
High Temperature 4X4 E8TZ-19590–A
XG-11 (FAD) /
—
Front Axle and Wheel
Bearing Grease
ESA-M1C198–A
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140–QL /
6.9 pints (3.3L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-90
XY-75W90–QLS /
8.5 pints (4.0L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSS–M2C918–A
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140–QL /
14.0 pints (6.6L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft High
Fill to line or step
Performance DOT 3
(for clutch) on
PM-1–C / WSS-M6C62-A
Motor Vehicle Brake
reservoir
Fluid
Motorcraft Premium
26.4 quarts
VC-7-B /
Gold Engine Coolant
(25.0L)
WSS-M97B51-A1
(yellow-colored)
Capacity
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Maintenance and Specifications
Capacity
Ford part name
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Engine coolant - 6.8L
V10 engine2
27.5 quarts
(26.0L)
Motorcraft Premium
VC-7-B /
Gold Engine Coolant
WSS-M97B51-A1
(yellow-colored)
Engine and fuel coolant Refer to the 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
- diesel engine
Owner’s Guide Supplement
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
Premium Synthetic
Engine oil (includes
CXO-5W20–LSP12
Blend Motor Oil (US)
filter change) - 5.4L V8
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
(Canada) /
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
and 6.8L V10 gas
WSS-M2C930-A
and API
Super Premium Motor
engines6
Certification Mark
Oil (Canada)
Engine oil (includes
Refer to the 6.0/6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
filter change) - diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement
6
engine
Fuel tank - Mid-ship
19.0 gallons
tank (optional on
—
—
(71.9L)
Chassis Cab)
30.5 gallons
Fuel tank - Short box
—
—
(115.5L)
38.0 gallons
Fuel tank - Long box
—
—
(143.9L)
40.0 gallons
Fuel tank - Aft axle
—
—
(151.4L)
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
353
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Motorcraft Premium
Long-Life Grease
MERCON 威 V Automatic
Transmission Fluid
—
Keep fluid level
between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
2.0 quarts (1.9L)
5.8 quarts (5.5L)4
Transmission / parking
brake linkages and
pivots, brake and clutch
pedal shaft (if
equipped)
Power steering fluid
Transfer case fluid
354
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Manual transmission
fluid
XT-M5-QM /
WSS-M2C200
XL-12 / —
17.5 quarts
Automatic transmission (16.6L)5 (includes Motorcraft MERCON威 SP
XT-6–QSP/MERCON威 SP
remote filter
ATF
fluid3
element change)
Motorcraft Transfer Case
Fluid
Motorcraft Full Synthetic
Manual Transmission
Fluid
XT-5-QMC / MERCON 威
V
XG-1-C or XG-1-K /
WSD-M1C227-A
XL-1 / None
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
—
Lock cylinders
XG–4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93–B
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Multi-Purpose Grease
—
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, fuel filler door
hinge and seat tracks
Ford part name
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
3.5 quarts (3.3L)
Windshield washer fluid
Ford part number /
Ford specification
ZC-32–A /
WSB-M8B16–A2
Ford part name
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
6
5
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with
the vehicle on a level surface. The 6–speed manual transmission is equipped with an in-tank cooler.
Verify the fluid level after operating vehicle to ensure correct fluid level.
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 SP should only use MERCON威 SP fluid.
Use of a dual usage fluid in an automatic transmission requiring MERCON威 SP may cause
transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are
indicated on the dipstick blade or the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being
added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to determine the
correct service interval.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Add 8 oz. (236 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification
EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of limited slip Ford axles. Ford design rear axles contain a
synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.
1
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
355
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
5.4L V8 engine
330
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1.02–1.28mm
(0.040–0.050 inch)*
Coil on plug
9.8:1
6.8L V10 engine
415
87 octane
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
1.02–1.28mm
(0.040–0.050 inch)*
Coil on plug
9.2:1
*The 5.4L 3V and 6.8L 3V spark plug gap CANNOT be adjusted.
Drivebelt routing
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 engines
356
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the driver’s door or
the edge of the driver’s door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
357
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission/transaxle code on the vehicle Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following table tells you which
transmission or transaxle each code represents.
Code
5
7
T
B
Description
Six-speed manual, Dana (ZF S6–650)
Six-speed manual, Dana (ZF M6HD-W)
Five-speed automatic, TorqShift (gas engines)
Five-speed automatic, TorqShift (diesel engine)
358
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada authorized
dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to
fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement
the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each
accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds
Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor
Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed
Genuine Ford Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied
materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be
warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories available for
your vehicle. Not all accessories are available for all models. For a
complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle,
please contact your authorized dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tips
Deflectors
Running boards
Splash guards
Step bars
Tonneau covers
Wheels
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Bedliners and bedmats
359
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Cargo organization and management
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-ease娂 hands-free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
Not all accessories are available for all models.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by your authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
360
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................99
Air cleaner filter ...............348–350
Air conditioning ..........................75
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ................................171–172
and child safety seats ............173
description ..............................172
disposal ....................................175
driver airbag ............................174
indicator light .........................175
operation .................................174
passenger airbag .....................174
passenger deactivation
switch ......................................176
Ambulance packages ....................8
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................324
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................235
Anti-theft system ......................148
arming the system ..................149
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................22, 24, 30
Automatic transmission ............240
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................241
fluid, adding ............................343
fluid, checking ........................343
fluid, refill capacities ..............352
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................36
Auxiliary power point .................96
Axle
refill capacities ........................352
traction lok ..............................239
B
Battery .......................................322
acid, treating emergencies .....322
jumping a disabled battery ....290
maintenance-free ....................322
replacement, specifications ...350
servicing ..................................322
Belt-Minder威 .............................167
Brakes ........................................235
anti-lock ...................................235
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................235
fluid, checking and adding ....342
fluid, refill capacities ..............352
parking ....................................236
shift interlock ..........................240
trailer .......................................223
Break-in period .............................5
Bulbs ............................................85
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....352
Cassette tape player ...................22
Cell phone use ..............................7
Child safety restraints ..............181
child safety belts ....................181
Child safety seats ......................184
attaching with tether straps ..188
in front seat ............................185
in rear seat ..............................185
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............307
instrument panel ....................309
interior .....................................310
plastic parts ............................309
safety belts ..............................310
washing ....................................306
waxing .....................................306
wheels ......................................307
wiper blades ............................309
361
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............75
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................31
AM/FM/CD .................................25
Clutch
fluid ..........................................342
operation while driving ..........244
recommended shift speeds ....244
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment ...............127
Console ......................................116
overhead ....................................96
Controls
power seat ...............................154
steering column ......................107
Coolant
checking and adding ..............324
refill capacities ................327, 352
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ..................104
Customer Assistance ................265
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................313
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................302
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................303
Getting roadside assistance ...265
Getting the service you
need .........................................298
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................304
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................302
362
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................81
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................343
engine oil .................................319
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................348
Driving under special
conditions ..................243, 256, 259
sand .........................................258
snow and ice ...........................260
through water .................258, 262
DVD system .................................43
E
Electronic message
center .................................116, 122
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................290
Emergency Flashers .................267
Emission control system ..........338
Engine ........................................356
cleaning ...................................307
coolant .....................................324
diesel ...........................................8
fail-safe cooling .......................328
idle speed control ...................322
refill capacities ........................352
service points ..................316–317
starting after a collision .........267
Engine block heater .................234
Engine oil ..................................319
checking and adding ..............319
dipstick ....................................319
filter, specifications ........321, 350
Index
recommendations ...................321
refill capacities ........................352
Exhaust fumes ..........................234
F
Fail safe cooling ........................328
Family entertainment system ....43
Fluid capacities .........................352
Foglamps .....................................80
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......248
description ..............................252
driving off road .......................254
electronic shift ................248, 252
indicator light .........................249
lever operated shift ................250
manual locking hubs ..............248
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................239
Fuel ............................................330
calculating fuel
economy ..........................124, 335
cap ...........................................332
capacity ...................................352
choosing the right fuel ...........333
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................338
detergent in fuel .....................334
filling your vehicle
with fuel ..................330, 332, 335
filter, specifications ........330, 350
fuel pump shut-off switch .....267
improving fuel economy ........335
octane rating ...................334, 356
quality ......................................334
running out of fuel .................334
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................330
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......267
Fuses ..................................268–269
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............332
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................335
Gauges .........................................18
transmission fluid
temperature gauge ...................22
H
Hazard flashers .........................267
Head restraints .........................151
Headlamps ...................................80
aiming ..................................82, 84
autolamp system .......................80
daytime running lights .............81
flash to pass ..............................81
high beam .................................81
replacing bulbs .............86, 88–90
turning on and off ....................80
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system ...........................71–72, 75
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................112
Hood ..........................................315
I
Ignition ...............................231, 356
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................184
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................340
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................309
cluster ........................................12
363
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................82
J
Jump-starting your vehicle ......290
K
Keyless entry system ...............146
autolock ...................................136
programming entry code .......146
Keys ...........................................149
positions of the ignition .........231
fluid capacities ........................352
reverse .....................................245
Message center .................116, 122
english/metric button .............126
system check button ..............125
warning messages ...........119, 128
Mirrors ...................................96, 99
fold away .................100, 102–103
heated ......................................100
side view mirrors (power) .....100
signal .......................................103
Moon roof ..................................110
Motorcraft parts ................330, 350
L
N
Lamps
autolamp system .......................80
daytime running light ...............81
fog lamps ...................................80
headlamps .................................80
headlamps, flash to pass ..........81
instrument panel, dimming .....82
interior lamps ...........................85
replacing bulbs .......85–86, 88–93
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................85
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........235
Load limits .................................212
Loading instructions .................218
Locks
autolock ...................................136
childproof ................................140
Lug nuts ....................................289
Lumbar support, seats .............155
M
Manual transmission .................244
364
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Navigation system .......................43
O
Octane rating ............................334
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................319
Overdrive .....................................95
P
Parking brake ............................236
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....350
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) ...............................104
Power adjustable foot pedals ...104
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................273
Power door locks ......................136
Power mirrors ...........................100
Power point .................................96
Power steering ..........................238
Index
fluid, checking and adding ....340
fluid, refill capacity ................352
Power Windows ...........................98
Preparing to drive
your vehicle ...............................239
R
Radio ................................22, 24, 30
Rear seat entertainment
system ..........................................43
Relays ........................................268
Remote entry system ...............141
illuminated entry ............144, 146
locking/unlocking doors .........136
Reverse sensing system ...........246
Roadside assistance ..................265
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........170
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..........158, 160–162, 164
Safety defects,
reporting ............................304–305
Safety
restraints ...........158, 160–162, 164
Belt-Minder威 ...........................167
extension assembly ................170
for adults .................160–162, 164
for children .....................180–181
lap belt ....................................166
safety belt maintenance .........170
warning light and
chime ...............................166–167
Safety seats for children ..........184
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................357
Satellite Radio Information ........40
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............158
Seats ..........................................151
child safety seats ....................184
cleaning ...................................311
heated ........................................75
memory seat ...................142, 156
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ................................148–149
Servicing your vehicle ..............314
Setting the clock
AM/FM/CD .................................25
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................31
Snowplowing .................8, 262–264
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................350, 356
Special notice ................................9
ambulance conversions ..............8
diesel-powered vehicles .............8
utility-type vehicles ....................8
Speed control ............................104
Starting your vehicle ........231–233
jump starting ..........................290
Steering wheel
controls ....................................107
tilting .........................................95
T
Tailgate ......................................131
Tilt steering wheel ......................95
Tires ...................................194–195
alignment ................................204
care ..........................................200
changing ..........................279, 282
checking the pressure ............199
inflating ...................................196
365
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
label .........................................211
replacing ..................................202
rotating ....................................204
safety practices .......................203
sidewall information ...............206
snow tires and chains ............211
spare tire .................................278
terminology .............................195
tire grades ...............................195
treadwear ........................194, 201
Towing .......................................219
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............223
trailer towing ..........................219
wrecker ....................................296
Traction control ........................237
Traction-lok rear axle ...............239
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................223
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................348
Transmission
automatic operation .........95, 240
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....240
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................343
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................347
366
2008 F-250/350/450/550 (f23)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
fluid, refill capacities ..............352
manual operation ....................244
Turn signal ..................................85
U
Upfitter controls .......................109
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................357
Vehicle loading ..........................212
Ventilating your vehicle ...........234
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................318
Water, Driving through .............262
Windows
power .........................................98
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................94
checking and adding fluid .....318
replacing wiper blades ...........318
Wrecker towing .........................296
367
368
Download PDF

advertising